Anda di halaman 1dari 348

AVEVA Electrical

Wiring Manager
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited

Disclaimer
AVEVA Electrical provides cable sizing calculations for estimation purposes only, end users of the software should
not rely on the calculations produced by the software for design purposes. End users should seek the advice of
certified cable suppliers prior to specifying or purchasing cables.

To the fullest extent permissible at law:

a) AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from viruses;

b) AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the customer, including any loss suffered by the customer resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of
any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or
arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise;

c) AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the
customer's claim is brought.

In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this manual and the associated software,
(including source code, object code, and any data) belongs to or is validly licensed by AVEVA Solutions Limited or
its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may also not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the product described in
this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior
written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 2000 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

The AVEVA Electrical user interface is based on the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ user interface.

Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries. AVEVA product names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
trademarks belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly forbidden.

Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation.

The Microsoft Office User Interface is subject to protection under U.S. and international intellectual property laws
and is used by AVEVA Solutions Limited under license from Microsoft.

AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks


March 2012 Copyright added to all pages.
March 2013 12.1.SP1 Updates incorporated
August 2013 12.1 SP2 Updates incorporated
July 2014 12.1 SP3 Updates incorporated
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Contents Page

Wiring Manager
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Feature Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Guide Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1


Open an AVEVA Electrical Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Electrical Wiring Manager Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Project Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Home Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Manage Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
List Tools Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Select a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Select a Colour Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Working with the Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Finding and Replacing Text in a Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Advanced Grid Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Grid Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Using PickLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6

© Copyright 2000 to current year. i 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Add Area, Buildings, Equipment Rooms and Vendor Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Add Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Add Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Add Equipment Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:7
Add Vendor Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Add Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Add Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12
Edit and Rename Items in the Equipment View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16
Equipment Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18
Compartment Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
Terminal Strips, Earth Bars, Din Rails, Devices, I/O Modules and Group Labels .
4:25
Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:26
Add DIN Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:27
Add Devices (Relays, Barriers etc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:28
Select Device from the Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29
Add I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:30
Select an I/O Module from the Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:32
Add Group Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:33
Modify Terminal Strips and Earth Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:33
Copy Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:34
Copy and Move Equipment with Internal Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:34
Copy Equipment with Cables and Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:34
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:36
Select Parent Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:40
Change Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:40
Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:41
Import Equipment from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:48
Termination Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:53
Report Revision Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:54
Attachments (External Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:57
View the List of Attachments for an Equipment Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:57
Add a new Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:57

© Copyright 2000 to current year. ii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Edit Attached Document Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:58


Delete Attached Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:58
Importing Attached Documents Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:59
Export Attached Documents Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:62
Equipment Catalogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:63
Major Equipment Catalogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:63
Field Device Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:65
Device Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:67
I/O Module Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:71
Importing Catalogue Items from another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:74

Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Cable Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Create a New Project Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5
Select Catalogue Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Select Cable Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12
Create New Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Copying Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
Edit Project Cable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:16
Bulk Edit Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
Delete Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:19
Change Cable Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:20
Assign Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:22
Assign Cable Gland Adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:22
Merge Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:23
Import Cables from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:25
AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:30
Cable Design Import Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31
Import the Design Data for Multiple Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:32
Import the Design Data of Single Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:34
Update Estimated Cable Lengths with Design Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:37
Bulk Freeze and Unfreeze Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:37
Find Cable Cores Not Terminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:38
Cable Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:39
Add Cables to the Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:40
Edit Catalogue Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:45

© Copyright 2000 to current year. iii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Change Cable Core Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:47


Importing Catalogue Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:49
Cable Glands and Cable Gland Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:55
Cable Gland Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:55
Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:57
Importing Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adaptor Catalogue Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . 5:59
Cable Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:64
Cable Drum Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:64
Create Cable Drums Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:65
Auto-Cable Drumming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:70
Assign Cables to Drums from the Cable Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:72
Bulk Lock and Unlock Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:72

Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1


Calculate Single Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
External Cable Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Single Cable Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Multiple Loads Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Cable Sizing Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Cable Sizing Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Cable Sizing Check Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21

Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Access the Terminations Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Terminations User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Main Graphics Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Cables to Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Cores to Terminate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Tab Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Terminals Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
Wire Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
Devices and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:8
Create and Edit Terminations using the Terminations Window . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Select Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Set Terminals as Reserved or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Terminate Wires/Cores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
Cable Termination Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:12

© Copyright 2000 to current year. iv 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Disconnect Wires/Cores. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13


Add a New Project Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
Create Multiple Wires between Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
Create Links and Looping Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:17
Auto Cross Patch Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:18
Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:19
Trace Wire Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:19
Create Terminations across Equipment Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:20
Change Terminal Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:20
Cables and Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:21
Import Terminations from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:22
Termination Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:27
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:30
Title Blocks on Termination Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:36

Wire Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1


Manual Ferrule Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Automatic Ferrule Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3
Ferrule Rule Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Assign Ferrule Rules to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Updating Ferrule Nos by Ferrule Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8
Viewing Ferrule Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9

Cable Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1


Create a New Cable Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Create or Edit Content of a Basic Cable Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Add Existing Equipment and Cables to Basic Cable Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
Interactive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8
Changing a Cable End (Destination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Add Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:12
Create a New Project Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:16
Field Device Wiring Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:17
Cable Drawing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:18
Create or Edit Content of an Enhanced Cable Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:19
Add Equipment and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:26
Change Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:31
Create a New Project Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:31
Edit Symbols and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:34
Edit Appearance of Cable Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:34

© Copyright 2000 to current year. v 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

View and Edit Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:35


View Termination Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:37
Field Device Wiring Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:38
Delete Symbols and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:40
Refresh the Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:41
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:42
Basic Cable Block Diagram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:42
Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:46
Add or Edit Cable Block Diagram Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:50
Create New Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:52
Cable Label Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:58
Copy Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:59
Import Symbols from another Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:60
Edit Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:62
Delete Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:62

Using Wiring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1


Create Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Wiring Rule Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Adding a New Wiring Rule Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5
Add Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8
Add Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
Define Cable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12
Add Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:14
Terminate Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:15
Delete Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16
Edit Wiring Rule Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16
Field Device Wiring Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:20

Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to XPS and PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
AVEVA NET Export Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Export Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4

Work Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. vi 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Change Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1


Audit Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Database Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1


AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1

© Copyright 2000 to current year. vii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

© Copyright 2000 to current year. viii 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

1 Introduction

The Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide is designed to help users learn how to use the
Electrical Wiring Manager module of AVEVA Electrical. The User Guide describes how to
create detailed project cable and wiring termination data.
Electrical Wiring Manager manages all tasks typically carried out by an Electrical Designer
relating to detail cable, wiring and termination design. This includes definition of equipment
terminal arrangements, cable creation and terminations etc., generation of Cable Schedules
and cable, cable gland and cable gland adapter Bill of Materials etc. Wiring Manager can be
used to:
• Manage all project cables including the definition of cable type, source and
destinations, manufacturer, catalogue number, length etc (i.e. a typical project Cable
Schedule).
• Manage equipment definitions including equipment layouts and terminal arrangements/
markings.
• Produce Cable Schedules / Bill of Materials, equipment terminations and other reports.
• Produce Cable Drum Schedule.
• Produce Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adapter Bill of Materials.
• Create detailed Cable and Wire Termination reports.
• Produce interactive Cable Block Diagrams using a drag and drop interface.
• Interface with other AVEVA Electrical applications to automate production termination
diagrams and reports including AutoCAD drawings.
• Share equipment and cables with AVEVA Electrical.
For a more detailed list refer to Feature Overview.

1.1 Feature Overview


Electrical Wiring Manager handles all tasks related to detail cable, wiring and termination
design. Electrical Wiring Manager has three integrated modules:

Wiring Manager - Equipment


Enables fast definition and editing of equipment terminal arrangements including terminal
strips, design of 'internal' wiring and cable terminations.

Wiring Manager - Cables


Enables fast definition of project cables from a user definable cable catalogue and
assignment of cable ends to equipment. Also used to assign cable glands, gland adapters
and for Bill of Materials reporting and Cable Drumming, and the sizing of power cables.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

Wiring Manager - Cable Block Diagrams


Provides a graphical representation of cable interconnections. Users can create equipment
and cables within each diagram or drag existing equipment into a diagram. All
interconnected equipment is automatically added and the cables shown.
AVEVA Electrical uses 'Wiring Rules' to handle automatic generation of wiring and cabling.
By using the Wiring Rules features, users can save many hours otherwise required to
manually build terminal arrangements, cables, terminations etc. Refer to Using Wiring Rules
for more information.
The features below enable easy and efficient cable/wiring design:

Advanced Graphic User Interface


• Graphical representation of all equipment terminal strips and terminals.
• Easy to learn, intuitive and accurate representation of plant equipment and cabling.
• Drag and drop wire terminations (from list of wires not yet terminated).
• Plant Equipment View displayed as hierarchy of plant areas, buildings, locations,
equipment types etc., for easy access.
• Search for and locate any equipment tag in Equipment View or Cable Schedule.
• Jump to Cable Terminations from cable schedule and jump to other end of wire when
viewing terminations.
• Build interactive cable block diagrams to view your project or plant cables.
• Jump to and edit Cable Terminations or internal equipment layout from any cable block
diagram.
• Jump to and edit cable details from cable block diagram.

Cable Management
• Create cables by copying existing cables or create manually by selecting from the user
definable cable catalogue.
• Cable Schedule grid supports user definable columns, order and filters.
• Auto create Cable Block Diagrams from the cable schedule.
• Merge two cables to create a new cable (where cables have same source and
destinations).
• Split cables into two, based on cable properties (cable type, core size, screens/shields
etc.).
• Change of catalogue number updates all core markings and re-aligns cores by type
and marking.
• Assign Cable Glands from user definable gland catalogue based on gland/cable
properties (i.e. auto match cable outside diameter/Gland range).
• Assign Cable Gland Adapters from user definable gland adapter catalogue based on
gland/equipment connection properties.
• Produce cable schedule reports, cable Bill of Materials (BOM), Gland BOM and Gland
Adapter BOM reports.
• Auto-assign cables to cable drums optimising drum usage (minimising cable wastage).
• Share individual cables and catalogue cables with AVEVA Instrumentation.

Equipment
• Graphical representation of all equipment terminal strips and terminals in Plant/Area
hierarchy.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

• Define equipment terminal arrangements.


• Copy existing equipment arrangements (and optionally cables and their terminations).
• Merge Terminal Strips in same equipment, move terminals to new strip (i.e. split),
retaining wire terminations.
• Move Terminal Strips to other equipment, retaining wire terminations.
• Access equipment terminations.
• Create Termination diagram/reports in PDF format.
• Export equipment and equipment catalogue data to AVEVA NET.
• Share individual equipment with AVEVA Instrumentation.

Cable/Wire Terminations
• Drag and drop wire terminations (on wire by wire basis or terminate an entire cable).
• Auto connect cables/wires by matching wire numbers.
• Work with a list of cables and cable cores not yet terminated.
• Supports multiple terminations per terminal.
• Supports wire number inheritance (wire numbers are 'passed' along interconnected
cable cores and wires).
• Supports independent wire ferrule numbers and automatic ferrule numbering based on
user-defined rules.
• Supports terminal marking modification (terminal re-numbering) one at a time or in
groups.
• Automatic cross-patch wiring within equipment (e.g. Marshalling Cabinets) and
between equipment in same location (room).
• Supports “Links” between terminals, fused terminals and disconnect terminals.
• Supports “Looping Wires” between terminals (external links between terminals).
• Create graphical termination reports instantly in PDF format without requiring any CAD
application.
• Export cable schedule, cable drum schedule and cable catalogue data to AVEVA NET.

Cable Block Diagrams


• Auto create Cable Block Diagrams (CBDs) by dragging equipment from the AVEVA
Electrical Equipment Treeview or Equipment List.
• Auto create CBDs by dragging cables from the AVEVA Electrical Cable Schedule.
• CBDs are fully interactive with the database enabling editing of cables, equipment and
terminations from the diagram.
• Export CBDs to AutoCAD (AutoCAD license required).
• Add new equipment and cables to the project database and drag and drop cable ends
to reconnect (updating Cable Schedule).

Reports
• Cable Schedule (user defined layout) including export to Excel, XPS and PDF.
• Cable Bill of Materials.
• Cable Gland Bill Of Materials.
• Cable Gland Adapter Bill of Materials.
• Cable Drum Schedule.
• Ferrule Numbers (by Equipment/Terminals), including export to Excel.
• Termination Reports (print or saved as PDF).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

Change Management
• Report all cables added, deleted and renamed.
• Report detail changes in each field (e.g. Length now 50 was 100).
• Log changes for future reporting (e.g. Cable No changed: Cable No. 1234 was 4567
etc).
• Audit Manager enables users to view changes by object type.

User Security Rights


An AVEVA Electrical administrator can set security rights for users to enable/disable access
to AVEVA Electrical functionality including:
• Access to AVEVA Electrical application modules - users can be restricted from using
any module (license).
• Access to AVEVA Electrical objects can be restricted to read-only (e.g. a user cannot
add/edit a cable) or no access (i.e. the user cannot view a cable).
AVEVA Electrical objects include project entities such as cables, equipment etc and
catalogues, the importing of data etc.
By default, all new projects have the Security Rights features disabled for backward
compatibility with earlier versions of AVEVA Electrical. If security is required it must be
turned on using the AVEVA Electrical Security Manager. Users must then be allocated to
'Security Groups' such as Engineers and Designers, Read-Only Users etc. Refer to the
AVEVA Electrical Security Manager User Guide n for more information.

1.2 System Requirements


For the minimum system requirements needed to run AVEVA Electrical, refer to the
Installation User Guide.

1.3 AVEVA Electrical


For an overview of AVEVA Electrical, its features and benefits, refer to the Common
Functionality User Guide.

1.4 Guide Structure

Introduction a brief description of Electrical Wiring Manager.

User Interface describes the Electrical Wiring Manager user interface.

Options describes how to set various Wiring Manager options and


preferences.

Equipment used to view project equipment in the Equipment Treeview.

Cables used to add/edit and view all project cables and allows
definition of cable types.

Cable Sizing describes how to size cables.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

Terminations the user interface for all cable and wire terminations in the
project.

Wire Numbering describes the methods and procedures used to number


wires.

Cable Block Diagrams describes the creation and use of cable block diagrams, that
provide interactive access to project equipment and cabling.

Using Wiring Rules describes how to use Wiring Rules to automatically


generate typical equipment wiring/cabling.

Export to AVEVA NET describes the facilities to export files of item data for import
into AVEVA NET.

Work Packs can be created with selected equipment and time scales for
a particular project.

Change Reports describes facilities that enable users to view database


changes made to project

Report Manager describes the in-built Report Manager that enables users to
create and modify reports.

AVEVA NET Export explains the configuration required for AVEVA NET Export.
Configuration Files

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Introduction

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 1:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

2 User Interface

When Electrical Wiring Manager starts up the AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager window is
displayed showing the Home tab.

The Select an AVEVA Electrical Project window is also displayed.


Continue at:
• Open an AVEVA Electrical Project
• Electrical Wiring Manager Tabs
• Select a Language
• Select a Colour Scheme
• Working with the Data Grid
• Finding and Replacing Text in a Grid
• Advanced Grid Filters
• Grid Manager
• Using PickLists
• Claims

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

2.1 Open an AVEVA Electrical Project


When an AVEVA Electrical module is started, the Select an AVEVA Electrical Project
window is displayed, from which the required project can be selected. refer to the Common
Functionality User Guide for details.

2.2 Electrical Wiring Manager Tabs


On opening, the Wiring Manager module displays four tabs: Project, Home, Manage and
View. Once a grid is opened, an optional List Tools tab, named after that grid and containing
commands specific to that grid, is displayed if there are any.
The rest of this section describes those tab options specific to Wiring Manager.
For details of options common to all Electrical modules, refer to the Common Functionality
User Guide.

2.2.1 Project Tab


The Project tab includes the following Wiring Manager-specific options:

Setup Sub Menu:

Ferrule Rule Displays the Ferrule Rule Definition window which is used for
Definitions creation or modification of Ferrule Rules. The Ferrule Rules
feature enables automatic ferrule numbers (wire number
markings) to be added to wire ends after termination.

Wiring Rule Displays the Wiring Rule Definitions window which is used for
Definitions creation or modification of Wiring Rules. The Wiring Rules
feature is used to automatically create equipment cables and
to terminate cable cores/wires at each end.

AVEVA Cable Design Displays the AVEVA Cable Design Import window. Refer to
Import Configuration AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface.

2.2.2 Home Tab


The following Wiring Manager-specific options are accessed from the Select option in the
Lists and Schedules section:
Under the List heading:

Equipment View Displays equipment in a hierarchy. From the Equipment View,


equipment and their terminal arrangements including terminal
strips, devices and Earth Bars can be defined and edited. Users
can access equipment 'internal' component layouts, cable
terminations and design of 'internal' wiring/terminations. Refer to
Equipment Viewx.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

Equipment List Displays equipment in a Grid View. From the grid, equipment and
their terminal arrangements can be defined and edited. Users can
access equipment 'internal' component layouts, cable terminations
and design of 'internal' wiring/terminations. The Grid View enables
easy filtering by equipment type and editing of additional
equipment properties. Refer to Equipment List.

Equipment Displays a list of equipment. Using this list, users can assign
Ferrule Rules Ferrule Rules for automated wire/ferrule numbering. Refer to
Assign Ferrule Rules to Equipment

Cable Schedule Displays the Wiring Manager Cable Schedule Grid View. From the
grid, users can project cables from a user definable cable
catalogue and assign cable ends to equipment. Also provides
facilities to assign cable glands, gland adapters and for Bill of
Materials reporting. Refer to Cable Schedule.

Cable Drum Displays the Wiring Manager Cable Drum Schedule (cables can
Schedule also be 'auto-drummed' from the Cable Schedule grid).. Refer to
Cable Drums.

Cable Block Provides graphical representations of cable interconnections.


Diagrams Users can create equipment and cables within each diagram or
drag existing equipment and/or cables into a diagram and all
interconnected equipment is automatically added and cables
shown. Users can access equipment 'internal' component layouts,
terminations and cable details from the diagram.Refer to Cable
Block Diagrams.

Under the Catalogue heading:

Major Equipment Displays the Major Equipment Catalogue grid view.

Field Devices Displays the Field Device Catalogue grid view.

Devices Displays the Device Catalogue grid view.

I/O Modules Displays the I/O Module Catalogue grid view.

Cables Displays the Cable Catalogue grid view.

Cable Glands Displays the Cable Gland Catalogue grid view.

Cable Gland Displays the Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue grid view.
Adapters

The following Wiring Manager-specific options are accessed from the Fixed Reports option
in the Reports section:

Equipment These options display previews of reports listing project


equipment, field devices and junction boxes and their details,
Field Devices in the Report Viewer (refer to Report Manager for details of
Junction Boxes the Report Viewer).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

Control System Tags Opens a grid view listing all Electrical Engineer tags not
Not Assigned assigned to an I/O Channel.

Cable Cores Not Opens a grid view listing cable cores that are not terminated.
Terminated

Wires Not Terminated Opens a grid view listing wires that are not connected at both
at Both Ends ends.

Cable Length Opens a grid view listing cables with lengths that do not match
Mismatch their design lengths (as imported from AVEVA Cable Design -
refer to AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface for details).

Device BOM

I/O Module BOM

Cable BOM These options open grid views displaying bills of materials for
devices, I/O module, cables, cable glands and cable gland
Cable Gland BOM adaptors.

Cable Gland Adaptor


BOM

2.2.3 Manage Tab


The Manage tab includes the following Wiring Manager-specific options:
In the Integration section:

Publish to AVEVA Used to export files of item data for import into AVEVA NET.
NET Refer to Export to AVEVA NET.

AVEVA Cable Used to import the design length of cables from AVEVA Cable
Design Import Design (from PDMS or Marine projects). Refer to AVEVA Cable
Design Data Interface.

In the Import section:

From Other Project Used to import Catalogue data (cables and field devices) from
other projects. Refer to Importing Catalogue Items from another
Project.

Attached Used to import attached documents details from an Excel


Documents spreadsheet. Refer to Attachments (External Documents).

Terminations Used to import terminations data from an Excel spreadsheet.


Refer to Import Terminations from Excel.

Import from Cable Used to import cable sizing details from an Excel spreadsheet.
Sizing Refer to Cable Sizing Import.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

In the Export section:

Export Cables for Used to export cable data to an Excel spreadsheet into which
Cable Sizing cable sizing data may be entered. The spreadsheet may then be
imported with the sizing data back into Wiring Manager. Refer to
Cable Sizing Export.

2.2.4 View Tab


All options on the view tab are common to all AVEVA Electrical modules.

2.2.5 List Tools Tab


The List Tools tab contains options specific to the grid which is currently being viewed, if
there are any. If no grid is open, the tab will not be displayed.
The name of the tab will be the name of the current grid.

2.3 Select a Language


If required, a different language can be selected. For a description of this functionality, refer
to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.4 Select a Colour Scheme


If required, a different colour scheme can be selected. For a description of this functionality,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.5 Working with the Data Grid


For a description of the generic functionality of the Data Grid used in all AVEVA Electrical
applications, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.6 Finding and Replacing Text in a Grid


Any text string within a grid can be found, highlighted and optionally replaced. For a
description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.7 Advanced Grid Filters


Advanced (complex) filters can be applied to a grid. For a description of this functionality,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.8 Grid Manager


The Grid Manager enables users to define their own sets of data fields (columns), default
column orders, default sorting and predefined data filters for most grids. For a description of
this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
User Interface

2.9 Using PickLists


Many grid cells and window fields can be, or must be, completed by selecting from lists of
values. These “Pick Lists” can be edited if required. For a description of this functionality,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

2.10 Claims
If a user attempts to edit an item which is currently being edited by another item, a message
is displayed to inform the user that the item is locked. For details of how to unlock claims,
refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 2:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Options

3 Options

General project preferences for Wiring Manager are set from the Options window.
On the Project tab, click Options to display the Options window.

General Tab

The General tab is used to specify the following preferences.


Cable Length Units
Meters (m) or Feet (ft)

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Options

Cable Earth Core Code


Enter the code of cable earth cores.
Use Auto Ferrule Numbering Rules
When checked, switches on the facility for automatically updating of Ferrule Numbers to all
wire ends on termination based on Ferrule Number Rules.
Catalogue Cable Group Core Markings
This effects catalogue cables created or edited after any change to this preference setting.
Wiring Manager will create cores in new catalogue cables using these default core
markings/colours.

Catalogue for ‘Core Group Type’ Core Markings


This effects catalogue cables created or edited after any change to this preference setting.
Wiring Manager will create cores in new catalogue cables using the default core group type
markings entered in the Cores Group Type window, accessed by clicking the Cores
button.

Click Add Item to add another marking and enter it the Marking column. To delete a
marking, select it and click Remove Item.

Auto Cable Number Options


If this option is checked, Wiring Manager will auto-name (auto Cable number) cables based
on their From and To (source/destination) equipment numbers. Wiring Manager will
automatically update the cable number whenever a cable end is added/changed. Auto cable
numbering currently only supports naming based on From and To equipment numbers.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Options

The Cable No delimiter will be placed in between the From and To equipment numbers
(e.g. FROM '/' TO).
Overall Cable Schedule
Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project, the Show cables
from both Instrumentation and Electrical checkbox will be disabled. If sharing is enabled,
it will be checked by default.
If the checkbox is not checked, cables from Instrumentation are not displayed in Electrical. If
the checkbox is checked, such cables will be displayed, (for example in the Cable Schedule
list), but cannot be edited or deleted.

Note: Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project setup, or
afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the Installation
User Guide for details.

Equipment Layout Tab

The Equipment Layout tab is used to change the colours Wiring Manager uses to show
internal equipment components in the Equipment Layout window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Options

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 3:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

4 Equipment

In Wiring Manager, the Equipment View provides a a hierarchical view of all electrical
equipment and field devices grouped by Plant Area and Location type.
From the Equipment View, equipment and field devices etc can be created, as well as new
Plant Areas, buildings, equipment rooms etc. Refer to Add Area, Buildings, Equipment
Rooms and Vendor Packages, Add Equipment and Add Field Devices for details. See also
Edit and Rename Items in the Equipment View and Copy Equipment.
Equipment can also be viewed in a grid format in the Equipment List.
Wiring Manager includes a facility for designing and viewing internal equipment component
layouts in a graphical user interface. Refer to Equipment Layout for details.
Terminal Strips, Din Rails and Devices can be added and edit both from the Equipment
Layout interface and the Equipment View. Refer to Terminal Strips, Earth Bars, Din Rails,
Devices, I/O Modules and Group Labels for details.
Facilities are provided to add major equipment to the project in bulk using a wizard. Refer to
Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment.
Equipment may also be added by importing from an Excel spreadsheet. See Import
Equipment from Excel for details.
In Wiring Manager, reports on equipment termination reports can be produced. Refer to
Termination Reports for details.
Wiring Manager includes facilities to attach external documents/files to equipment tags and
for the viewing of these attached documents. Refer to Attachments (External Documents)
for details.
Wiring Manager includes Equipment Catalogues which used to define standard equipment
items and their terminal arrangements. These catalogue items can be used in the creation
of project equipment. See Equipment Catalogues for further information.

4.1 Equipment View


The Equipment View window displays a hierarchical view of all Electrical equipment (and
field devices) grouped by Plant Area and equipment type.
To access the Equipment View window, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section
of the Home tab. Select Equipment View from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Equipment View window is then displayed.
The figure below shows a typical Equipment 'treeview' with a pop-up menu, activated by a
right-click on a treeview node. The pop-up menu provides context sensitive commands to
add/edit equipment for a project:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Equipment Tree Overview


To navigate through the project treeview, 'click' on an equipment node's '+' icon to expand it.
The treeview not only shows the project equipment, but also the DIN Rails, circuit breakers,
terminal strips, compartments, compartment elements etc. of the equipment.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To add an equipment node, right-click on the appropriate node to display a pop-up menu
with relevant options for that equipment node type. The options vary depending on the
selected equipment type. For example, the pop-up menu in figure above gives add options
for the Junction Box node selected. For this Junction Box users can add: a field device, a
device (relay, IS Barrier etc), an I/O module, a terminal strip, a DIN rail (DIN rails can contain
terminals and devices/IO modules mixed together in any sequence and quantity) or an
Earth Bar.
For most equipment nodes, options to edit and delete the selected item are available, plus a
facility to find any equipment number. When an Equipment node (i.e. a Junction Box,
Cabinet, Field Device etc) has been selected, an option to print (or print preview) the
terminations for the selected equipment is also provided.
Double-clicking on any node that contains terminals, terminal strips, DIN rails, earth bars,
devices, compartments or compartment elements will bring up the Wiring Manager's
Terminations. This window allows terminations to be defined through a 'drag and drop' style
graphical user interface.

Pop-up Menu Commands


As explained above, the right-click (on a node) pop-up menu is context sensitive. The menu
will display a selection of the following commands:

Edit Detail Displays a window for editing the data of the item
represented by the selected node. Refer to Edit and
Rename Items in the Equipment View.

Edit Terminations Displays the Terminations window. Refer to Terminations


User Interface.

Various Add .... Clicking on an Add... command will display a window for
commands: adding equipment to the Wiring Manager database. The
item to be added is created at the equipment node (or Area
node if an Area node is selected etc) selected when the pop-
up menu was opened (the node that was right-clicked on).
Refer to Refer to Add Area, Buildings, Equipment Rooms
and Vendor Packages, Add Equipment, Add Field Devices
and Terminal Strips, Earth Bars, Din Rails, Devices, I/O
Modules and Group Labels.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Cut Allows the current selected equipment node to be moved.


Select the node to move, then 'Cut', then select a new
parent node then 'Paste'. This also moves any DIN Rails,
terminal strips and devices etc (if the selected equipment
has 'internal components').

Paste Used to complete a copy or move/cut.

Note: Wiring Manager will only allow copying/moving to a valid parent node based on
equipment type. For example a PLC Cabinet cannot be pasted (copied or moved)
to a Terminal Strip or a DIN Rail copied to an Plant Area or a PLC Cabinet to a
PLC Cabinet etc.

Copy Used to copy the currently selected equipment node. Select


the node to copy, right-click then select Copy, then select
the new parent node (e.g. a Plant Area, Building or Room)
then right-click and select Paste from the menu. This
command also copies any internal components (DIN Rails,
terminal strips and devices etc - if the selected equipment
node has any). Any 'Links' and/or 'Looping Wires' are also
copied.

Copy (with 'From' This menu option only appears if the node selected has
cables) 'From' cables (i.e. cables in the cable schedule leading from
this equipment). Select the node to copy, right-click then
select Copy (with 'From' cables), then select the new
parent node (e.g. a Plant Area, Building or Room) then right-
click and select the Paste command.
This command is the same as above Copy command but
also copies any cables and terminates the new cables
exactly as the cables are terminated in the original 'source'
equipment selected. The Copy Equipment with Cables
window is displayed, used to assign new Cable Numbers to
the copied cables. See Copy Equipment.

Delete Used to delete the item (node).

Refresh Refreshes the view and closes all the sub-menus

Find Displays a window used to enter a Tag Number and search


for it within the Equipment View.

Collapse All Closes all the tree “branches”.


Also available on the Tools - Equipment Tree tab.

Expand Selected Opens all the sub-”branches” for the selected item.
Also available on the Tools - Equipment Tree tab.

Print Preview Displays Termination Reports for the currently selected


Terminations equipment node as a Print Preview (if the node represents
Equipment).

Ferrule No Report Displays a window that shows all wire ferrule numbers for
each terminal strip/device in the selected equipment
allowing for easy definition of ferrule/wire numbers.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Auto Ferrule Selected Used to automatically add ferrule numbers to the wire ends
Equipment connected to the equipment in accordance with pre-defined
numbering rules. Accesses a sub-menu from where the left,
right or both sides of the equipment can be selected for
numbering. Refer to Updating Ferrule Nos by Ferrule Rules
for further information.

Create Wiring Used to create the wiring for equipment. Refer to Create
Wiring for further information.

Wiring Check Report Opens a report that displays the wiring for equipment that
have had wiring created for them. Refer to Field Device
Wiring Reports for further information.

Attached Documents Displays the Attached Documents window. Refer to


Attachments (External Documents) for further information.

Note: Wiring Manager is configured to allow only certain types of Equipment objects to be
'external' or 'internal' to other equipment types. For example a Cabinet cannot be
created or pasted (copied or moved) to a Terminal Strip or a DIN Rail created or
copied or moved to a Plant Area etc.

Note: Equipment can also be accessed from Wiring Manager's Equipment List grid. The
Equipment List support the Grid Manager, filtering etc.

Equipment View - Tools Options

The following options are located on the Tools - Equipment Tree tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Collapse All Closes all the tree “branches”.

Expand Opens all the sub-”branches” for the selected item.


Selected

Tools Section

Add Multiple Used to create multiple items of major equipment in bulk. Refer to
Equipment Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment for details.

Attached Documents Section

Open All Opens a list of all documents attached to the current equipment. Refer
to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

Attach Used to attach a document to the current equipment. Refer to


Document Attachments (External Documents) for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation


Equipment created in AVEVA Electrical can be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation and vice
versa. Refer to Add Equipment and Add Field Devices for details.
In the Equipment Tree, equipment created in Instrumentation and not shared with Electrical
is not displayed, nor is any “child” equipment of that equipment.

4.2 Add Area, Buildings, Equipment Rooms and Vendor


Packages
From the Equipment View, the areas, buildings, equipment rooms and vendor packages
that equipment is to be located in or part of can be created.
Continue at:
• Add Areas
• Add Buildings
• Add Equipment Rooms
• Add Vendor Packages

4.2.1 Add Areas


To create an area, right-click on an existing area node in the Equipment View and select the
Add Area option from the menu.
The Area Information window is then displayed:

The button next to the Area Type field displays a window for creating new area types. Refer
to the Common Functionality User Guide for details of how to create areas and area types.
Once the area details have been added, click OK to add the new area to the Equipment
View.

4.2.2 Add Buildings


To create a building, right-click on an area node or an existing building node in the
Equipment View and select the Add Building option from the menu.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

The Building Information window is then displayed:

Enter the details of the building and click Save to add it to the Equipment View.
The button next to the Status field displays a window in which the Status pick list can be
edited.
If the building is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Building with
Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Buildings shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

4.2.3 Add Equipment Rooms


To create an equipment room, right-click on an area node in the Equipment View and select
the Add Equipment Room option from the menu.
The Equipment Room Information window is then displayed:

Enter the details of the room and click Save to add it to the Equipment View.
The button next to the Status field displays a window in which the Status pick list can be
edited.
If the room is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Room with
Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Rooms shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA Instrumentation
but not edited.

4.2.4 Add Vendor Packages


To create a vendor package, right-click on an area node or an existing building node in the
Equipment View and select the Add Vendor Package option from the menu.
The Vendor Package Information window is then displayed:

Enter the details of the package and click Save to add it to the Equipment View.
The button next to the Status field displays a window in which the Status pick list can be
edited.
If the package is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Package with
Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Packages shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

4.3 Add Equipment


From the Equipment View, right-click on a node of the equipment type to be created
(Control Stations or PLC Cabinets) and select the Add (Equipment Type) command from
the right-click pop-up menu.
The Equipment Tag window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

This window is used to specify the tag of the new equipment.


The Class list consists of all classes to which tag formats have been assigned in Electrical
Engineer. Select the required class.
The Tag Format list is then populated with all the tag formats that have been assigned to
the selected class (the class designated the primary class is automatically pre-selected).
Select the required tag format from this list.
The fields displayed under the Tag Format list will depend on the fields that the selected tag
format consist of.
If the “Free Form” tag format is selected (see above), simply enter the required tag in the
Equipment No field.
If a different tag format is selected, the displayed fields will change to reflect this. For
example:

Note that any delimiters defined for tag format are displayed after the fields they follow.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Complete the fields as required. Note that if the tag format includes “Function”, the list of
available functions will be restricted to those associated with the selected class.
For details of classes and tag formats refer to the Electrical Engineer User Guide.
The entered tag number is displayed at the bottom of the window. For example:

Note: If the selected tag format for the equipment includes “Area”, although any area be
selected in the Area field (and this will form part of the equipment’s tag number),
entering a different area from the one in which the equipment type node is located
will not set the actual plant area of the equipment to that area.

When the required tag data has been entered, click OK.
The (Equipment Type) Information window is then displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To change the tag number, click the button next to the Tag No field to display the
Equipment Tag window again (see above).
Whatever may have been entered in the Equipment Tag window, the Area No field will
display the plant area of the equipment node. Changing the area displayed here will not
change the plant area of the equipment.
The Area Path: displays the parent area(s) of the plant area, if there are any.
The Termination Drawing checkbox enables this equipment to be added to the AVEVA
Electrical Designer's Drawing List so that a CAD termination drawing can be created for this
equipment's terminations.
The Signal Class Applies and Signal Service Applies checkboxes are only for reference
purposes. There is no limit to what cables or field devices that can be assigned or
terminated to the equipment. This can be used, for example, to help the designer or
engineer flag analog signals to be used in the equipment.
If the equipment is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Equipment
with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Equipment shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

Click Save to save the new equipment tag.


The new equipment is automatically placed under the appropriate Equipment Type node.

Note: When saving Wiring Manager will check the Tag No. is unique for the project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: Although Equipment can contain Terminal Strips (users cannot add terminals directly
to Equipment, they must add a Terminal Strip which will contain Terminals) and/or
equipment rails (DIN rails) - which in turn may contain a mixture of terminal strips
and/or devices (barriers/relays etc) and/or I/O modules. Refer to Add Terminal Strips
and Earth Bars.

Copying Equipment from the Major Equipment Catalogue


Users may copy a standard equipment configuration from those defined in the Major
Equipment Catalogue.
Clicking From Catalogue displays this window:

To select a catalogue equipment, double-click on the equipment record or select the


equipment record and click Select.
New equipment created from catalogue equipment will contain the terminal strips and
terminals (including terminal markings) of the selected catalogue equipment. (after the Save
button is clicked in the original Equipment detail window).

4.4 Add Field Devices


Right-click on the appropriate field device node and select Add Field Device from the
Equipment View right-click menu.
The Equipment Tag window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

This window is used to specify the tag of the new field device.
The Class list consists of all classes to which tag formats have been assigned in Electrical
Engineer. Select the required class.
The Tag Format list is then populated with all the tag formats that have been assigned to
the selected class (the class designated the primary class is automatically pre-selected).
Select the required tag format from this list.
The fields displayed under the Tag Format list will depend on the fields that the selected tag
format consist of.
If the “Free Form” tag format is selected (see above), simply enter the required tag in the
Equipment No field.
If a different tag format is selected, the displayed fields will change to reflect this. For
example:

Note that any delimiters defined for tag format are displayed after the fields they follow.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Complete the fields as required. Note that if the tag format includes “Function”, the list of
available functions will be restricted to those associated with the selected class.
For details of classes and tag formats refer to the Electrical Engineer User Guide.
The entered tag number is displayed at the bottom of the window. For example:

Note: If the selected tag format for the equipment includes “Area”, although any area be
selected in the Area field (and this will form part of the device’s tag number), entering
a different area from the one in which the field device node is located will not set the
actual plant area of the device to that area.

When the required tag data has been entered, click OK.
The Field Device Information window is then displayed

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To change the tag number, click the button next to the Tag No field to display the
Equipment Tag window again (see above).
Whatever may have been entered in the Equipment Tag window, the Area No field will
display the plant area of the field device node. Changing the area displayed here will not
change the plant area of the device.
The Area Path: displays the parent area(s) of the plant area, if there are any.
The terminal configuration of a field device can be specified by copying data from the Field
Device Catalogue. This facility is accessed using the From Catalogue button, as described
below.
If the equipment is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Equipment
with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Equipment shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

Click Save to save the new Field Device tag.

Note: When saving Wiring Manager will check that the Tag No. is unique for the project.

Note: Users may add new Field Device definitions to Wiring Manager's Field Device
Catalogue. Refer to Field Device Catalogue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Copying Terminal Configurations from the Field Device Catalogue


Users may copy the terminal configuration of a field device from those defined in the Field
Device Catalogue.
Clicking From Catalogue displays this window:

This window shows all Field Devices defined in the Field Device Catalogue. Users may add
to this list by defining new Field Devices in the Field Device Catalogue.
Select a configuration either by double-clicking on Field Device image on the Graphic tab or
the record on the List tab, or click on the required configuration on either tab and then click
Select.

4.5 Edit and Rename Items in the Equipment View


To edit any item in the Equipment View, right-click on it and select the Edit Detail option from
the menu.
A window is then displayed in which the item can be renamed, and its details changed. The
window displayed depends on the type of item selected.
If an area, building, equipment room, vendor package, winding or field device is selected for
editing, the appropriate information window is displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: The Last Edit field displays the date and time when the item data was last edited.
The user name of the individual that performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when
the mouse cursor is hovered over the field. Click the button in the field to display the
Audit Manager, which will display a list of all the changes to the equipment data.

Note: Compartment elements and distribution board circuit breakers can only be added,
deleted and edited using the AVEVA Electrical Engineer module. In Wiring Manager
it is only possible to view details of existing items of these types. Changes cannot be
saved (the OK button of the Details window is disabled).
Compartments themselves may be edited to some extent. However, like
Compartment elements, they can only be added and deleted in the Engineer module.

If equipment or a compartment is selected for editing, the Equipment Layout window is


displayed, in which the item details can amended. For details of the Equipment Layout
window, refer to Equipment Layout.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

See Equipment Layout for more information on the Layout window.

Note: Renaming equipment automatically renames any references to that equipment (e.g.
all cables in the cable schedule with a destination to the equipment, termination
report and drawings etc references will by changed.

4.6 Equipment Layout


Wiring Manager includes a facility for designing and viewing internal equipment component
layouts in a graphical user interface. This interface shows all the internal components such
as Terminal Strips, Devices, I/O Modules, Earth Bars and Compartments for the current
Equipment item.
It can also be used to view and edit the internal components of Compartments (Terminal
Strips, Devices etc.), although not the compartment elements (items such as circuit
breakers, fuses, meters, transformers etc.) themselves.
Access the Equipment Layout window from the:
• Equipment View, by right-clicking on any Equipment (or Compartment) node then
selecting the Edit Detail option.
• Equipment List, by clicking on the in-cell button displayed when the mouse is hovered
over Equipment No field, then selecting Edit Detail option from the displayed Options
window.
• Cable Schedule, by clicking the button in the From and To cells, and selecting Edit
Detail from the displayed Options window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

• Cable Block Diagrams, by right-clicking on any equipment, then selecting the Edit
Detail option.
• Major Equipment Catalogue, by selecting an item from the Major Equipment Catalogue
grid view, then clicking Edit and selecting Edit Detail from the displayed Options
window.
The Equipment Layout window is then displayed:

Edit the equipment details as required.

Note: Any changes made in this window are not saved until the Save command button is
selected.

Note: The Last Edit field that appears on this and other windows displays the date and
time when the equipment data was last edited. The user name of the individual that
performed the edit is displayed in a tool-tip when the mouse cursor is hovered over
the field. Click the button in the field to display the Audit Manager, which will display
a list of all the changes to the equipment data.

Note: If a Compartment layout is being edited, many of the fields are disabled. Most
Compartment details may only be edited in the Engineer module. Refer to
Compartment Layouts for more information on viewing and editing Compartments
and Compartment element layouts.

The Termination DWG Required checkbox allows the equipment to be added to the Wiring
Manager Designer's Drawing List so that a CAD termination drawing can be created for the
equipment's terminations.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

The Signal Class Applies and Signal Service Applies checkboxes fields are for reference
purposes only. There is no limit to what cables or field devices that can be assigned or
terminated to this equipment. They can be used, for example, to help the Designer or
Engineer assign analog signals to this equipment.

Add or Edit Components


Right-click on a Terminal Strip, Device, I/O Module or Earth Bar, (or any place holder line) to
display a context-menu, for example:

Note: Terminal Strips, Devices, etc. cannot be added to an MCC or Switchboard with
Compartments. They must be added to the Compartments themselves. Refer to
Compartment Layouts for more information.

Click Edit Detail to edit information on the existing component right-clicked.


Click Copy to copy the selected component.
Click Add to add a new component.
The window that is displayed when the Add (or Edit Detail) option is selected will depend of
the equipment component type:

Terminal Strip refer to Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars

Device (IS Isolator/Barrier, refer to Add Devices (Relays, Barriers etc)


Relay, Power Supply etc)

I/O Module (DCS, PLC etc) refer to Add I/O Modules

Earth Bar refer to Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars

If blank space is right-clicked on, a different menu is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

These include the Add options as described above, plus the following option:

Add Group/Label used to add a group name to the terminal strip, device etc
that is next to the blank space that was clicked on to open
the menu. Refer to Add Group Labels.

To delete an item, select the Delete Component option.

Equipment Arrangement
To rearrange the internal equipment drag and drop components from DIN Rail to DIN Rail or
up and down a DIN Rail.

Note: Wiring Manager always inserts new or dropped components before the component
dropped on or right-clicked on.

Note: A DIN Rail is automatically added whenever a new component is added to a new
'column' or an existing component is dragged to a new 'column' within this layout.

Other Facilities
Click Edit Terminations (from the right-click menu or the button bar) to edit wire
terminations. The Terminations window is then displayed. See Terminations User Interface
for details.
Click Print Preview Terminations to view the Termination report for the item. Refer to
Termination Reports for details.
Click Ferrule No Report to view the ferrule markings/numbers of the item. Refer to Viewing
Ferrule Markings for details.
Click Auto Ferrule Selected Equipment to apply a Ferrule Rule to the item. Refer to
Updating Ferrule Nos by Ferrule Rules for details.

Share with AVEVA Instrumentation


If the equipment is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Equipment
with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Equipment shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA Instrumentation


but not edited.

4.6.1 Compartment Layouts


If the Equipment Layout window for an MCC or Switchboard that contains Compartments
is accessed (see Equipment Layout), the Compartments are displayed in the window. For
example:

The details of the equipment can be edited as described in Equipment Layout.


Click Edit Terminations to edit wire terminations. The Terminations window is then
displayed. See Terminations User Interface for details.
To view details of a Compartment, right-click on it and select the Edit Compartment Detail
option from the menu that is then displayed. The Compartment Detail window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

These details can only be edited in the Engineer module. The OK button is therefore
disabled.
Terminal Strips, Devices, I/O Modules, Earth Bars and Groups/Labels cannot be added to
an MCC or Switchboard with Compartments. They must be added to the Compartments
themselves.
To access the Equipment Layout window for a Compartment, either:
• Right-click on that Compartment in the Equipment Layout window of the equipment
that contains in and select Edit Detail option from the menu that is then displayed.
• Or, in the Equipment View, right-click on the Compartment node and then select the
Edit Detail option.
The Equipment Layout window for the Compartment is then displayed, showing the
Compartment elements. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Edit Terminations to edit wire terminations. The Terminations window is then
displayed. See Terminations User Interface for details.
Terminal Strips, Devices, I/O Modules, Earth Bars and Groups/Labels can added and edited
in the same way as described in Equipment Layout, using right-click menus.

Note that the Copy and Delete Component options are not available on the right-click
menu for Compartment elements, as these actions can only be carried out in the Engineer
module.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To view details of a Compartment element, right-click on it and select the Edit Detail option
from the menu that is then displayed. The Detail window is then displayed. For example:

These details can only be edited in the Engineer module. The OK button is therefore
disabled.

4.7 Terminal Strips, Earth Bars, Din Rails, Devices, I/O


Modules and Group Labels
Terminal Strips, Earth Bars, Din Rails, Devices I/O Modules and Group Labels can be
created from the Equipment View and the Equipment Layout window.
Continue at:
• Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars
• Add DIN Rails
• Add Devices (Relays, Barriers etc)
• Select Device from the Catalogue
• Add I/O Modules
• Select an I/O Module from the Catalogue
• Add Group Labels

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

• Modify Terminal Strips and Earth Bars

4.7.1 Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars


To add a Terminal Strip or an Earth Bar, from the Equipment Layout window, right-click on
any DIN Rail or existing component and click either Add Terminal Strip or Add Earth Bar
as appropriate on the pop-up menu.
Or, from the Equipment View context sensitive right-click menu (after right-clicking on an
appropriate equipment node) click Add Terminal Strip or Add Earth Bar. The appropriate
information window is then displayed.

Terminal Strip No/ Enter any unique value for the current equipment as the Terminal
Earth Bar Name Strip number or Earth Bar name.

No. of Terminals Defines the number of terminals in the strip/bar.

First Terminal No Defines the starting terminal marking. Wiring Manager will create
incremented terminal markings for all subsequent terminals.

Note: Wiring Manager does not support auto numbering of any terminals except for
simple incremental numerical (count). However, once the terminal strip/earth bar
has been created users can edit individual terminal markings in the Terminations
User Interface.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Field Wires Is only valid when using Wiring Rules to terminate field cables on
Terminate on equipment terminal strips/earth bars. When checked, field cables
Right are terminated on the right side of this terminal strip/earth bar.
When unchecked field cables are terminated on the left of the
terminal strip/earth bar.

Create the New Terminal Strip or Earth Bar


Enter a Terminal Strip No or Earth Bar name (a label), a Sequence No, enter the number of
terminals required, the first terminal number and click Save. Wiring Manager will create all
the terminals marked sequentially from the 'First Terminal No.' entered (e.g. 1, 2, 3 etc) and
add the new Terminal Strip or Earth Bar under the parent equipment tag in the Equipment
View.
Terminal markings can be edited from within the Wiring Manager Terminations User
Interface.
To change existing terminal strips and earth bars refer to Modify Terminal Strips and Earth
Bars.

4.7.2 Add DIN Rails


A DIN Rail enables any mixture of Terminal Strips, Devices including I/O modules on a
single mounting rail.
In the Equipment Layout window, a DIN Rail is automatically added whenever a new
component is added to a new 'column' or an existing component is dragged to a new
'column'.
DIN Rails can also be added by clicking Add DIN Rail (or Group) on the Equipment View
context-sensitive right-click menu (after right-clicking on an appropriate equipment node).
The Din Rail (Group) Information window is then displayed:

To create the new DIN rail enter a Din Rail name (a label) and a sequence number and click
Save.
Wiring Manager will place the new Din Rail under the parent equipment tag in the
Equipment View.

Note: Sequence numbers define the order of multiple terminal strips/DIN Rails within the
equipment. This effects the Equipment Treeview as well as equipment termination
reports and equipment termination drawings created by Designer. The lowest
sequenced terminal strip/DIN Rails will appear first, highest last etc. within each
Equipment item.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

When editing a DIN Rail, users can change the Device sequence list on the right, which
shows all components currently assigned to the DIN Rail. To change the sequence of
components on the rail, drag and drop the items in the Device sequence list to create the
sequence required.

4.7.3 Add Devices (Relays, Barriers etc)


A Device (component) is defined in the Wiring Manager Device Catalogue. This can be a
Relay, IS Barrier, I/O Modules, Power Supplies or any other 'black box' with terminals.
Although devices can be added to almost any equipment item, it is more usual to group
devices together on rails. In Wiring Manager DIN Rails offer a convenient method of
grouping devices and/or terminal strips together in a user defined sequence.
To add a Device, in the Equipment Layout window, right-click on any DIN Rail or existing
component and click Add Device from the pop-up menu.
Or, in the Equipment View context-sensitive right-click menu: (after right-clicking on an
appropriate equipment node), click Add Device menu option.
Devices may also be added from the Cable Block Diagrams window by right-clicking on any
Equipment and selecting the Edit Detail option to display the Equipment Layout window.
The Device Information window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To create a new device:


• Enter a Device Tag or Description and,
• Select a device from the Wiring Manager Device Catalogue - click Select from
Catalogue which allows selection from the Device catalogue. Refer to Select Device
from the Catalogue.
• Optionally enter a Status (new, existing etc) from the Status list.
• Enter a Sequence number (defines the sequence the device will appear on the DIN
Rail).
Note: The sequence is not viewable in this window if creating or editing a Device from the
Wiring Manager Equipment Layout window. When adding a new Device in the
Layout window the sequence is defined by the position which the component is
added. To change the sequence in the Layout window, drag and drop the
component to a new position (sequence).

• Select the Rotated option to rotate the Device 180 degrees (i.e. place it upside down
on the rail with respect to its catalogue definition.
Once a device is selected, the Catalogue Information fields display the Model No,
Manufacturer and Description, and the graphic is updated to show the terminal
arrangement of the selected device. For example:

Note: Device information is fixed for each specific catalogue entry. Users cannot edit
device information from project equipment. Users can only edit/add devices from the
Wiring Manager Device Catalogue. Also, if a catalogue definition is changed in the
Device catalogue all the project instances are changed to the new definition.

Click Save to save the new device to the parent equipment (or DIN Rail).

Add Multiple Devices


If it is required to create multiple devices of the same catalogue component, then prior to
clicking Save, check the Add Multiple checkbox then enter the number of devices required
in the Quantity field. Click Save to create the number of devices entered.

Note: Wiring Manager will create these devices with a blank equipment no (tag no) and
increment the sequence from the one entered in this window.

Users may edit the device by selecting a different device component from the catalogue at
any time during the project by re-selecting another device from the Wiring Manager Device
catalogue.

4.7.4 Select Device from the Catalogue


When adding a new Device from the Wiring Manager Device Catalogue (see Add Devices
(Relays, Barriers etc)) this window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To select a Device from the catalogue, double-click on the Device record, or select the
Device record, then click Select.
Wiring Manager will then create the new project Device by copying the catalogue Device
definition, including all terminals and their markings.

Note: Device information is fixed for each specific catalogue entry. Users cannot edit
device information from project equipment. Users can only edit/add devices from the
Wiring Manager Device Catalogue.

4.7.5 Add I/O Modules


An I/O Module component is defined in the I/O Module Catalogue. This can be for any
control system (DCS, SIS, PLC etc).
Although I/O modules can be added to almost any equipment item, it is more usual to group
modules together on rails. In Wiring Manager DIN Rails offer a convenient method of
grouping devices and/or terminal strips together in a user defined sequence.
To add an I/O Module, in Equipment Layout window, right-click on any DIN Rail or existing
component and click Add I/O Module from the pop-up menu.
Or, in the Equipment View context-sensitive right-click menu (after right-clicking on an
appropriate equipment node), click Add I/O Module menu option.
I/O Modules can also be added from the Cable Block Diagrams window by right-clicking on
any Equipment and selecting the Edit Detail option to display the Equipment Layout
window.
The I/O Module Definition window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To create a new I/O Module:


• Enter an I/O Module Tag No or Description, and
• Select an I/O Module definition from the Wiring Manager I/O Module catalogue, by
clicking the Select from Catalogue button. Refer to Select an I/O Module from the
Catalogue.
• Optionally select a Status (new, existing etc) from the Status list.
• Enter a First Point/Channel No. This defines how Wiring Manager numbers the
points/channels for I/O assignment reports.
• Optionally enter a Start Address. This will define how Wiring Manager creates each
point/channel Address (only if a value is entered: e.g. %AI00201).
• The Properties tab is optionally used to enter data for I/O module properties such as
Rack/Slot, System etc that can be viewed in the I/O Allocation Gridview/Report and
added to drawings produced with Wiring Manager Designer.
Once an I/O Module is selected, the Catalogue Information fields display the I/O Type,
Model No, Manufacturer, Description, No of Points etc and the graphic is updated to
show the terminal arrangement of the selected device as described below.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: I/O Catalogue information is fixed for each specific catalogue entry. Users cannot
edit I/O Module information from project equipment. Users can only edit /add
modules from the Wiring Manager I/O Module Catalogue. Also, if a catalogue
definition is changed in the I/O Module catalogue all the project instances are
changed to the new definition.

Click Save to save the new device to the parent equipment (or DIN Rail).
An I/O Module can be edited by selecting a different I/O Module from the catalogue at any
time.

4.7.6 Select an I/O Module from the Catalogue


When adding a new I/O Module from the Wiring Manager I/O Module Catalogue (seeAdd I/
O Modules), this window is displayed:

To select an I/O Module from the Catalogue, double-click on the I/O Module record, or select
the I/O Module record, then click Select.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Wiring Manager will then create the new project I/O Module by copying the catalogue I/O
Module definition, including all terminals and their markings.

Note: I/O Module information is fixed for each specific catalogue entry. Users cannot edit
device information from project equipment. Users can only edit /add devices from the
I/O Module Catalogue.

4.7.7 Add Group Labels


Labels can be added to terminal strips, devices etc in the Equipment Layout window.
To add a label, right-click on blank space in the layout next to the item to be labelled, and
click Add Group/Label on the context sensitive menu.
The Group Detail window is then displayed:

Enter the label that will appear on the layout, and a location/description.
Enter a sequence number.

Note: The sequence defines the order of multiple terminal strips/DIN Rails within the
equipment. This affects the Equipment Treeview as well as equipment termination
reports and equipment termination drawings created by Designer. The lowest
sequenced terminal strip/DIN Rails will appear first, highest last etc within each
Equipment item.

4.7.8 Modify Terminal Strips and Earth Bars


Existing terminal strips and earth bars can be modified:
From the Equipment View or Equipment Layout window, right-click on the Terminal Strip or
Earth Bar node or object. From the menu, select Edit Detail. The appropriate information
window then appears. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Enter the number of terminals required. Users can also specify the first terminal number. If
this First Terminal No. value is changed all terminals are renumbered sequentially from the
number entered. Users can also change the Terminal Strip No or Earth Bar Name (its tag
or label).

Note: If the number of terminals in the Terminal Strip or Earth Bar is reduced then all cable
cores or wires terminated on the terminals being deleted are first disconnected by
Wiring Manager.

4.8 Copy Equipment


Wiring Manager provides facilities to:
• Copy and Move Equipment with Internal Components
• Copy Equipment with Cables and Terminations
Note: Field devices cannot be copied, although they can be moved (i.e. cut and pasted).

4.8.1 Copy and Move Equipment with Internal Components


Existing equipment (Cabinets/Panels, Junction boxes etc) apart from field devices can be
copied with all their internal terminal/device arrangements by using the Equipment View's
Copy option on the right-click context menu.
From the Equipment View right-click on the Equipment node to be copied, click Copy on the
context menu, right-click on the parent node under which the new Equipment is to be placed
(typically an 'Area', 'Building', 'Room' or ‘Vendor Package’ node), and click Paste from the
context menu.
Wiring Manager will create a copy of the original Equipment naming the Equipment 'copy of
XXXXXX' where XXXXXX is the original Equipment Number.

Note: Use the right-click option Edit Detail to change the Equipment Number.

To move equipment, use the Cut and Paste options on right-click context menu the instead
of the Copy and Paste options, or drag and drop the equipment between nodes.

4.8.2 Copy Equipment with Cables and Terminations


Wiring Manager also supports copying existing equipment and any 'From' cables (cables in
the cable schedule with their 'From' ends defined as the equipment being copied). This

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

features enables the copying of all 'From' cables and will terminate the new cables exactly
as the original cables being copied. This features enables extremely fast creation of field
Junction Boxes and their main multi-pair (or home run) cables.
To copy Equipment along with cables and their terminations, from the Equipment View right-
click on the Equipment node to be copied, click Copy (with 'From' Cables) from the context
menu, right-click on the parent node under which the new Equipment is to be placed
(typically an 'Area', 'Building', ‘Vendor Package’ or 'Room' node), and click Paste from the
context menu.
The Copy Equipment with Cables window is then displayed, listing all the cables 'From'
the original equipment:

This window also provides a field for entering the new Equipment Number.

To Select the Cables to be Copied


Check the Select checkbox for all cables to be copied.

To (Optionally) Rename the New Cables


Change the entry in the New Cable No. field to a new value (if this is not changed Wiring
Manager will instead rename any existing Cable 'copy of XXXXXX' where XXXXXX is the
original Cable Number).

To (Optionally) Change 'To' End of New Cables


If this is not changed the new cable is routed to the same 'To' equipment as the original
cable.
To change a ‘To’ end, click the button which appears when the mouse cursor is hovered
over an Equipment No. cell
The Select Equipment window is displayed, enabling the user to select any existing
Equipment (or set the 'To' cable end to 'Not Connected').

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To select an equipment tag, double-click on the required tag or click on it and then click
Select. The window is then closed and the number of the specified equipment is displayed
in the Equipment No. cell.
To create a new equipment tag, select New. This displays the Equipment Information
window. Create the new equipment as described in Create New Equipment. The new
equipment is then added to the list in the Select Equipment window.
To copy an existing equipment tag, select the equipment from the list then select Copy
Selected. This displays the Equipment Information window with the details of the selected
equipment displayed. Amend these details as required and click Save. The new equipment
is then added to the list in the Select Equipment window and is available for selection.
To exit the window without selecting destination equipment, or to de-select destination
equipment previously selected so that the other end of the cable is no longer connected,
click either Not Connected or Exit.

4.9 Equipment List


All project equipment in Wiring Manager can be viewed in a Grid view using the Equipment
List window. This list provides facilities for the printing of termination reports for multiple
(selected) equipment, updating termination report document numbers, revisions etc and is
an alternate method of accessing equipment using grid filters and terminations.
To open the Equipment List, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Equipment List from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Equipment List grid
is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

All fields except those with a yellow background can be edited directly within the grid.
For information on Grid functionality refer to Working with the Data Grid.

Equipment List Layout


The Equipment List layout can be set by the user using the Grid Manager utility (select
Manager in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home tab). The Grid Manager enables
users to define Views, that is, which fields should be viewable in the Cable Schedule grid,
their default position (column order), column size, default sort order and whether a data filter
is applied (e.g. Show only 'New' items). New Grid Views can be saved for use by individuals
or for entire project teams and existing Views selected. Refer to Grid Manager for more
information.

Accessing Information
Clicking on the Equipment No. cell button that appears when the mouse is hovered over
that cell displays the Options window:

The options are as follows:


• Edit Detail: Displays the Equipment Detail window or Equipment Layout window,
depending on the selected equipment's type.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

• Edit Terminations: Displays the Terminations window. This option displays all
terminals/devices and terminations for the entire equipment.
View Terminations (Print Preview): Displays the Termination Reports print preview
window.

Select/Change Parent Equipment


Clicking on the button that appears when the mouse is hovered over the Parent cell enables
users to set the Equipment's Parent from other Equipment in the database. Refer to Select
Parent Equipment for details.

Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation


Equipment created in AVEVA Electrical can be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation and vice
versa. Refer to Add Equipment and Add Field Devices for details.
Whether or not equipment is shared, and if so, which application it was created in is
displayed in the Discipline column:
• If equipment is not shared, the discipline will be “Electrical”.
• If equipment is shared and was created in Electrical the discipline will be
“Elect(Shared)”.
• If equipment is shared and was created in Instrumentation the discipline will be
“Inst(Shared)”.

Shared equipment may be viewed in either application but may only be edited in the
application in which it was created.

Equipment List - List Tools Options

The following options are located on the List Tools - Equipment List tab

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Edit Displays the Terminations window. Refer to Terminations User


Terminations Interface for further information.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Auto Ferrule Used to automatically add ferrule numbers to the wire ends
Selected connected to the selected equipment in accordance with pre-
Equipment defined numbering rules. Accesses a sub-menu from where the
left, right or both sides of the equipment can be selected for
numbering. Refer to Updating Ferrule Nos by Ferrule Rules for
further information.

Create Wiring Used to create the wiring for equipment (loads). Refer to Create
Wiring for further information.

Revisions Displays a list of all revisions for termination reports associated


with the equipment in the grid. Refer to Viewing and Editing
Multiple Termination Report Revisions.

Add Revision Displays the Revision Entry window, enabling the user to add a
revision to an equipment termination report. Refer to Create a
Revision.

Edit Revision Displays the Revision Entry window, enabling the user to edit an
existing revision. Refer to Edit a Revision.

Change Symbol Used to change the symbol used to represent individual items of
equipment on enhanced cable block diagrams. Refer to Change
Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Symbols.

Tools Section

View Ferrule Displays a window listing ferrule markings/numbers for the current
Markings equipment. Refer to Viewing Ferrule Markings for details.

Add Multiple Used to create multiple items of major equipment in bulk. Refer to
Equipment Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment for details.

Printing Section

Preview Creates a Termination Report for the currently selected equipment


Termination as a Print Preview. Refer to Termination Reports for details. If
Report multiple equipment is selected in the grid, multiple previews are
generated.

Print Termination Prints a Termination Report for all the equipment currently selected
Report in the grid. Refer to Termination Reports for details

Export Section

To PDF Exports a Termination Report in PDF format for all the equipment
currently selected in the grid. Refer to Termination Reports for
details

Attached Documents Section

Open for Opens a list of all documents attached to the current equipment.
Selected Refer to Attachments (External Documents) for details.

Attach Document Used to attach a document to the current equipment. Refer to


Attachments (External Documents) for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

4.9.1 Select Parent Equipment


Users may select the Parent Equipment of an item of Equipment from a list of other
Equipment in the database.
This can be useful for example when users wish to group field devices together, such as
making a Limit/position switch have as its parent its Control Valve tag. In this example, the
Limit Switch would appear as a child node in the Equipment Treeview and any cable
connected to the Control Valve could be terminated on the Limit Switch in the Terminations
window since child field devices are shown in the parent equipment's Terminations window.
To select the Parent of equipment, click the Parent cell button that appears when the mouse
is hovered over that cell. The Select Parent Equipment window is then displayed:

To select an equipment tag, double-click on the required tag or click on it and then click
Select. The window is then closed and the number of the specified equipment is displayed
in the Parent cell.
To exit the window without selecting parent equipment, or to de-select parent equipment
previously selected so that the equipment no longer has parent equipment, click Not
Connected.

4.9.2 Change Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Symbols


The symbols used to represent equipment displayed on enhanced Cable Block Diagrams
may be changed on an individual basis.
In the Equipment List, in the Actions section of the List Tools tab, click Change Symbol.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

The Symbol List window is then displayed:

The window displays all the different project symbols for the selected item type (see Add or
Edit Cable Block Diagram Symbols). The Default Symbol checkbox indicates the default
symbol set for the type of item.
Select a different symbol either by double-clicking on it or clicking on it and clicking Select.
A message then confirms that the symbol for the item has been changed, and the window
exits.

4.10 Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment


Multiple items of major equipment can be created in bulk using the Add Multiple Equipment
facility.
Using this facility, multiple items of equipment can be added to the project and associated
with a selected major equipment catalogue item, from which their layout, cabling and
termination etc details are derived, by either:
• Importing them from an Excel spreadsheet, in which the basic details of the equipment
and the major equipment catalogue item are identified.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

• Entering details of multiple equipment, including the major equipment catalogue item,
in the Add Multiple Equipment wizard.

The Add Major Equipment Procedure


Open the Equipment View or the Equipment List. In the Tools section of the List/List Tools
tab, click Add Multiple Equipment.
The Add Multiple Equipment wizard window is then displayed:

Note: The facility can also be accessed from the Cable Block Diagrams window. See Add
Equipment. When the wizard is accessed from a Cable Block diagram, any
equipment created or imported is added to that diagram when the procedure is
completed.

Importing Equipment Details from a Spreadsheet


To import basic details from a spreadsheet, click Import. The following window is displayed,
which explains the format that spreadsheets to be imported from must be in:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Browse to select the required spreadsheet. Click Next > to start the import.
Details of the equipment imported from the spreadsheet are then displayed in the wizard:

As required, enter cable numbers and select destination equipment as described below.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Entering Basic Details in the Wizard


To enter basic details by entry into the wizard instead of, or as well as, importing from a
spreadsheet, click New.
A row of fields is then added to the wizard:

Select an Area number, enter a unique equipment number, and select a Major Equipment
Catalogue number.

Adding Multiple Rows


To add multiple rows of new equipment in one go, click Create Multiple, accessible from the
menu which is displayed when the arrow next to the New button is clicked.
The following is then displayed:

Select an Area number and a Major Equipment Catalogue number, and specify the number
of items to be added.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Next.
The multiple items are then added to the wizard:

The default equipment numbers of equipment added to the wizard in this way will be in the
following format, as shown above: “copy of New Equip(#)”. Amend these as required.

Entering Cable and Destination Details


Cable numbers must be entered if the selected Major Equipment Catalogue item for an
equipment item has a cable connected to it.
Enter the cable number in the cell provided. A new cable with this number will be created
along with the equipment.
If the Major Equipment Catalogue item for an equipment item has multiple cables connected
to it, then that number of cables will be created. If for example a Catalogue item for an
equipment item has four cables connected to it, and a cable number of “ABC” is entered in
the Cable No. field, a cable with that cable number will be created, plus three more called
“Copy of ABC”, “Copy of ABC(1)”, and “Copy of ABC(2)”. If a cable number already exists in
the database, the copy number will be incremented to make it unique.
If the selected catalogue item does not have a cable connected, leave this cell blank.
If a cable number has been entered, destination equipment may optionally be selected by
clicking the button in the Destination column. The Select Equipment window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To select an equipment tag, double-click on the required tag or click on it and then click
Select. The window is then closed and the number of the specified equipment is displayed
in the Destination cell.
To create a new equipment tag, select New, this displays the Equipment Information
window. Create the new equipment as described in Add Field Devices. The new equipment
is then added to the list in the Select Equipment window.
To exit the window without selecting destination equipment, or to de-select destination
equipment previously selected so that the other end of the cable is no longer connected,
click either Not Connected or Exit.

Copying Rows
To copy a row, select it, then click Copy Selected, accessible from the menu which is
displayed when the arrow next to the New button is clicked.
A copy of the selected row is then added to the wizard. Amend the details as required.

Deleting Rows
To delete a row or rows, select them in the wizard and click Delete. A message is then
displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to delete the selected row(s),
or No to cancel the deletion.

Creating the New Equipment


Once all the required data has been entered in the wizard, click Create.
If there is any conflicted data, i.e. any reasons why equipment cannot be created, these are
then listed on the next page of the wizard:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

This page is not displayed if there is no conflicted data.


If required, click < Back to return to the previous page of the wizard to correct these
problems.
To proceed with the creation of those items that do not have conflicts, click Next >.
The creation of the equipment then takes place. A log of the equipment creation process is
then displayed, with those items successfully created and those items not successfully
created listed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click OK to exit the wizard.


Equipment successfully created is added to the Equipment View and the Equipment List.
Any connected cables are added to the Cable Schedule.

4.11 Import Equipment from Excel


Equipment details can be imported from an Excel spreadsheet. There are three separate
import options, one for each of the following:
• Major Equipment
• Components
• Terminals
The Excel Spreadsheet
The Excel spreadsheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and rows) and the first
row should contain unique column names (headings) so that AVEVA Electrical can identify
the column's data. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated.
AVEVA Electrical will only import column data that contains a heading.
The Excel file must contain an identity column containing the Equipment Number.
For major equipment it must also contain Area Number and Equipment Type columns.
For components in must also contain Parent, Equipment Type and Catalogue Number
columns.
For terminals it must also contain Marking and Sequence columns.
Once an Excel spreadsheet is selected for import, users must 'map' each Excel column
name (heading) to an AVEVA Electrical database field using the AVEVA Electrical import
utility. Data can then be imported into AVEVA Electrical. The import utility will check if the
identity column field exists in mappings.
While processing records to be imported, if a record already exists in the database AVEVA
Electrical will show the differences between the imported data and the AVEVA Electrical
data, allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and
field by field) basis. If the record does not exist in AVEVA Electrical and the user accepts the
importation of the record, AVEVA Electrical will create a new record for that drawing or
catalogue item.
The Import Procedure
Open the Equipment View or the Equipment List. From the Import section of the Manage
tab, click From Excel.Then select as required either the Major, Components or Terminals
option from the window that is then displayed.

The Equipment Import wizard window is then displayed, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Browse and select the Excel file from which data is to be imported. Click Next >.
The next window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

Define a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

Once the name and description for the mapping has been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Import the Data


Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
A list of equipment in the spreadsheet that will not be imported because they are invalid in
some way in then displayed, along with the reason that they are invalid:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Next >.


A list of equipment which can be imported is then displayed.

To import an equipment item, check its Select checkbox. Check the Select all checkbox to
check all the Select checkboxes.
Click Next >.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

The selected list of valid equipment is then displayed:

Click Import to proceed with the import. The import then takes place. After the import is
complete, a log of the imported equipment is displayed:

Click Close the exit the import wizard.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

4.12 Termination Reports


In Wiring Manager, reports on equipment termination reports can be produced. These can
be printed out or saved in PDF format for electronic transfer. These reports are non-CAD so
they do not require a CAD program to create.

Note: Electrical also supports the creation of Termination Diagrams in AutoCAD DWG
format from the Designer module.

To generate an equipment Termination Report:


• From the Equipment View window, right-click on the equipment node. A menu is then
displayed. From the menu, click Print Preview Terminations.
• Or, from the Equipment List window, select a single (or multiple equipment) record(s),
and click Preview Termination Report in the Printing section of the List Tools -
Equipment List tab.
• Or, from the Cable Schedule grid, select the From or To grid cell button for a cable and
select the Print Preview Terminations option from the Options window that is
displayed.
• Or, from the Major Equipment Catalogue grid, select an item from the grid view, click
Edit and select View Terminations (Print Preview) from the displayed Options
window.
The Termination Report window is then displayed, showing a print preview of the report.
For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:53 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Wiring Manager creates a single termination report for the selected equipment, using
multiple pages if necessary. New pages are created when the number of terminals exceeds
the maximum allowable for a specific page size/orientation. Wiring Manager always creates
a new page for each new DIN Rail. Terminal strips on a common DIN Rail are kept together
and a new page is not created unless all terminals will not fit on the current page.
Users can zoom in by double-clicking on the graphic or using the magnify button on the
toolbar.
Use the Setup command to change printer properties (page size, orientation etc) for the
current document.
The Preferences command enables users to set the default page size for the entire project
(Wiring Manager defaults to A4 if not set otherwise) and set the maximum number of
terminals that Wiring Manager can draw on each page.
Click Print to print the report. Reports can also be printed using the Print Termination
Report option in the Printing section of the List Tools - Equipment List tab.
Users may export the report to PDF format using the Export to PDF command. Reports can
also be exported to PDF format using the To PDF option in the Export section of the List
Tools - Equipment List tab
Users can zoom into the document by double-clicking and pan the document by clicking on
the background and 'dragging'.

Note: Export to PDF creates a file in the project's Drawing folder with a file name of either:
The Sketch Number (as defined in the Equipment List) or if this Sketch Number is left
blank, the Equipment Number.

Title Blocks on Termination Reports


Wiring Manager supports title blocks and revisions on Termination Reports if the equipment
has a Sketch Number that is not blank/empty. Wiring Manager will create the termination
report with a title block complete with Revision history. Sketch (Document) numbers and
Revisions are added/edited from the Equipment List window.
Here is an example of a Title Block produced on the Termination Report when the
equipment has a Sketch Number:

Users can add/edit Termination Report document revisions for multiple reports. Refer to
Report Revision Entry.
This title block is 'fixed' and cannot be modified by the user in the current version of Wiring
Manager.

4.12.1 Report Revision Entry


Note: In order for a revision to be added to the termination report associated with an
equipment item, a Sketch (Document) Number must first be entered for that
equipment in the SketchDwgNo cell of the Equipment List.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:54 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Create a Revision
• To create a revision for a termination report, select the associated equipment in the
Equipment List and click Add Revision in the Actions section of the List Tools -
Equipment List tab.
• To create a revision for multiple termination reports, select the associated equipment in
the Equipment List and click Add Revision in the Actions section of the List Tools -
Equipment List tab.
When revisions are added using this method the details entered in Revision Entry
window (below) are assigned to all selected reports.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed:

Complete the fields as required.


When creating a new revision, leaving the Revision No field blank will cause Electrical to
use the next revision number. e.g. if the current revision is "A", then the next is "B" or if
current revision is "2", then the next is "3" etc.
The Date field defaults to the current date, but a different date may be selected if required.
The Description field contains a list of all previously created revision descriptions. Add a
new description by entering any required description. Any new descriptions will be available
for future revision entries.

Edit a Revision
• To edit the current revision for a termination report, select the associated equipment in
the Equipment List and click Edit Revision in the Actions section of the List Tools -
Equipment List tab.
• To edit the current revisions for multiple termination reports, select the associated
equipment in the Equipment List and click Edit Revision in the Actions section of the
List Tools - Equipment List tab.
When revisions are edited using this method the details entered in Revision Entry
window (below) are assigned to all selected reports.
The Revision Entry window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:55 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Edit details as required. See Create a Revision for details.

Viewing and Editing Multiple Termination Report Revisions


To view a list of all revisions of all termination reports in the Equipment List, click Revisions
in the Actions section of the List Tools - Equipment List tab. The Revisions window is
displayed:

To view the revisions for a single report, click on the + icon next to its listing.
To view revisions for all reports, click Show All Revs.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:56 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

4.13 Attachments (External Documents)


Wiring Manager includes facilities to attach external documents/files to equipment tags and
for the viewing of these attached documents.
Attachments can include any Windows supported file. Attached documents might contain
information such as: vendor data, catalogue data, calibration certificates, hazardous area
certificates, site photographs, CAD files etc.
While AVEVA Electrical supports the attachment of any Windows file format, to view an
attached document however the user's workstation must provide access to the an
application to open the attachment's file format (e.g. a PDF viewer to open PDF files).

4.13.1 View the List of Attachments for an Equipment Item


The view the list of all the attachments for an item of equipment, select the equipment in the
Equipment View or Equipment List, and click Open All in the Attached Documents section
of the Tools/List Tools tab. The Attached Documents window is then displayed:

To open an attached document, highlight the document and click Open.

4.13.2 Add a new Attachment


To attach a document to an equipment item, either:
• Click Attach Document in the Attached Documents section of the Tools/List Tools
tab of the Equipment View or Equipment List.
• Or open the Attached Documents window for the equipment and click New.
The Attached Document Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:57 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

The file to be attached is selected by clicking the button to the right of the Document field. A
file browser window is then opened, enabling the user to navigate to the file. Select the
required file and click Open on the file browser window to close the file browser window and
return to the Attached Document Details window. The Document field will be populated
with the selected file and file path.
The user can select a document type from the Type drop-down list or manually enter a new
type. An optional description can be entered in the Description text box.
Check the Public checkbox if the attachment is to be shared with all the users on the same
project. Leave the Public checkbox box unchecked if only the current user is to have
access to the attachment.

Note: Documents can also be attached by importing attached document details for an
Excel spreadsheet. See Importing Attached Documents Data.

4.13.3 Edit Attached Document Details


To edit a document attachment, highlight the attachment in the Attached Documents
window and select Edit to display the Attached Document Details window.

Edit the attachment details as required, as described above.

4.13.4 Delete Attached Document


To delete an attached document, highlight the tag in the Attached Documents window and
click Delete.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:58 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: Only the association to the attached document is deleted. Neither the tag or the
actual document file is deleted.

4.13.5 Importing Attached Documents Data


Attached documents data can be imported from an Excel spreadsheet.
Open the Equipment View or Equipment List. Click Attached Documents in the Import
section of the Manage tab. The Attached Document Import wizard window is then
displayed:

Click Browse and select the Excel file from which data is to be imported. Click Next >.
The next window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:59 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The
Mapping Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced
by a Save button.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:60 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
A list of equipment for which attached document details can be imported is then displayed.

Click Import to proceed with the import. The import then takes place. After the import is
complete, a log of the imported document details is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:61 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Click Close the exit the import wizard.

4.13.6 Export Attached Documents Data


The Attached Documents grid in the Attached Documents window can be exported to
Excel by clicking Export To Excel. A Save file as dialogue is displayed, enabling the user
to navigate to a chosen destination and to name the Excel file.
The user can change the folder path by clicking Change Folder to display a file browser
window allowing the user to navigate to a different folder or create a new folder. If the new
folder path does not contain the attached file a message window is displayed.

Clicking Yes changes the folder path in the Attached Documents window, but the user
cannot view any attachments until the file is moved or copied to the new folder path. Click
No to cancel the folder path change.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:62 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

4.14 Equipment Catalogues


AVEVA Electrical includes Equipment Catalogues which used to define standard equipment
items and their terminal arrangements. These catalogue items can be used in the creation
of project equipment. The equipment catalogues are:

Major Equipment Typically Cabinets, Junction Boxes etc.

Field Devices Field Instruments/Devices.

Devices Relays, IS Barriers/IS Isolators, Power Supplies etc.

I/O Modules Typical DCS and PLC I/O modules.

Access the Equipment Catalogues


Click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home tab.
A list of grids is displayed. Select the required catalogue from those listed under the
Catalogue heading:

Major Equipment Catalogue Displays the Major Equipment Catalogue list.

Field Device Catalogue Displays the Field Device Catalogue list.

Device Catalogue Displays the Device Catalogue list.

I/O Module Catalogue Displays the I/O Module Catalogue list.

4.14.1 Major Equipment Catalogue


Wiring Manager's Major Equipment Catalogue is used to define PLC Cabinets and Local
Control Stations and their terminal arrangements. By predefining terminal strip
arrangements users can set project standards that can be re-used many times. This can
also save time by copying pre-built equipment that will contain all the terminals and their
terminal markings/numbers as defined in the catalogue.
To access the Major Equipment Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Major Equipment Catalogue from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
catalogue grid is then displayed:

Refer to Working with the Data Grid for information on the grid controls.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:63 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Add Major Equipment to the Catalogue


To add Equipment to the project Major Equipment Catalogue, open the Major Equipment
Catalogue and click New in the Records section of the Home tab. The Equipment
Information window is displayed:

The user must enter a Catalogue Name and select an Equipment Type from the drop-
down list. Completion of the Description field is optional.
If the item is being supplied by a Vendor, check the Vendor Supplied checkbox.
Click Save to create the new catalogue item and close the window. The new item is then
added to the grid.
Click Cancel to close the window without adding an item.

Edit Catalogue Major Equipment


To edit Equipment in the project Major Equipment Catalogue, open the Major Equipment
Catalogue and click New in the Records section of the Home tab, or double-click on the
Equipment record in the grid. The Options window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:64 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Select the required option from the dialog:

Edit Detail Displays the Equipment Layout window. Refer to Equipment


Layout for further information.

Edit Terminations Displays the Terminations window. Refer to Terminations User


Interface for further information.

View Terminations Displays the Termination Reports window. Refer to Termination


(Print Preview) Reports for further information.

4.14.2 Field Device Catalogue


Wiring Manager's Field Device Catalogue is used to define Field Devices and their terminal
arrangements. Field Devices in the catalogue can be used in Wiring Rule definitions and to
set field device terminal arrangements for any field device in the project database.
To access the Field Device Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of
the Home tab.
Select Field Device Catalogue from the list of grids that is then displayed. The catalogue
grid is then displayed:

Note: Only those devices with their Allow Use checkbox column checked will be available
for use when creating Field Devices.

Importing Catalogue Data


Field Devices may be imported from another Wiring Manager project. In the Import section
of the Manage tab, click From Other Project.
Refer to Importing Catalogue Items from another Project for details.

Add a Catalogue Field Device


To add a Field Device to the project Field Device Catalogue, open the Field Device
Catalogue and click New in the Records section of the Home tab. The Field Device
Definition window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:65 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Check the Allow Use checkbox as appropriate. Only those devices with their Allow Use
checkbox checked will be available for use when creating Field Devices.
Enter a Catalogue name and description.
To define the Device Terminals, enter number of left terminals in Left Quantity, enter
number of right terminals in Right Quantity.

Note: Wiring Manager works best with field device terminals set as right-sided.

Changing either of the terminal quantities makes Wiring Manager refresh the graphic
representation of the device as shown below:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:66 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Define the Device Terminal Markings


Click in first terminal and enter the terminal marking value. Repeat for all terminals.

Note: The <Tab> key can be used to jump between terminals.

Share Catalogue Field Device with Instrumentation


If the catalogue Field Device is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the
Device with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Field Devices shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA
Instrumentation but not edited.

Edit a Catalogue Field Device


To edit a Field Device, open the Field Device Catalogue and click Edit in the Records
section of the Home tab, or double-click on the Field Device record in the grid. The Field
Device Definition window is displayed. Enter or change the details as described in Add a
Catalogue Field Device.

4.14.3 Device Catalogue


Wiring Manager's Device Catalogue is used to define Devices and their terminal
arrangements.
To access the Device Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:67 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Select Device Catalogue from the list of grids that is then displayed. The catalogue grid is
then displayed:

Note: Only those devices with their Allow Use checkbox column checked will be available
for use when creating Devices.

Importing Catalogue Data


Devices may be imported from another Wiring Manager project. In the Import section of the
Manage tab, click From Other Project.
Refer to Importing Catalogue Items from another Project for details.

Add a Catalogue Device


To add a Device to the project Device Catalogue, open the Device Catalogue and click New
in the Records section of the Home tab. The Device Definition window is displayed:

Check the Allow Use checkbox as appropriate. Only those devices with their Allow Use
checkbox checked will be available for use when creating Devices.
Enter a Device Type, manufacturer, model number and description.
To define the Device Terminals, enter number of left terminals in Left Quantity. Enter
number of right terminals in Right Quantity.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:68 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Changing either of the terminal quantities makes Wiring Manager refresh the graphic
representation, as shown below:

The Description on Drawing field can be used to change the default drawing description to
the value entered in this field. Using the <Enter> key will add a line-break in the drawing to
create multiple lines of text. Up to three lines can be created for the description in both
AutoCAD termination diagrams created in Wiring Manager Designer and Termination PDF
reports created in Wiring Manager. If this field is left empty the default description will be
used, which is the Manufacturer and Model No. separated a space.
To define the Device Terminal Markings, click in first terminal, enter the terminal marking
value and repeat for all terminals.

Note: The <Tab> key can be used to jump between terminals.

Note: Users can set a Terminal to be a 'Plug and Socket' or 'Normal' terminal by right-
clicking and setting the Terminal Type.

Define the Device Internal Connections


To enable Wiring Manager to trace signals through a Device, users should define its internal
connections as follows.
Select a terminal (hold the Ctrl key down and click on a Terminal). Select another Terminal
to define the two terminals internally connected, click + Internal Connection.
Wiring Manager will show the connections, as in the example below:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:69 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Share Catalogue Device with Instrumentation


If the catalogue Device is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation click Share the Device
with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: Devices shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

Edit a Catalogue Device


To edit a Device, open the Device Catalogue and click Edit in the Records section of the
Home tab, or double-click on the Device record in the grid. The Device Definition window
is displayed:

Change the details of the device as required. See Add a Catalogue Device for details.
To redefine the Device Terminals, enter the number of left terminals in Left Quantity, enter
the number of right terminals in Right Quantity. Changing either of the terminal quantities
makes Wiring Manager refresh the graphic representation.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:70 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

To edit terminal markings, select a terminal in the graphic and enter the new value.

Note: The <Tab> key can be used to jump between terminals.

Important: Changing the number of terminals or the terminal markings changes all devices
in the project that use the current Catalogue Device.

Redefine the Device Internal Connections


To enable Wiring Manager to trace signals through a Device, users should define its internal
logical connections. To define the devices internal logical connections, first save the new
device and then select Edit again; Wiring Manager does not allow the internal connections
to be saved until terminals have first been saved to the database.

Important: Changing the internal connections changes all devices in the project that use
the current Catalogue Device being edited.

4.14.4 I/O Module Catalogue


Wiring Manager's I/O Module Catalogue is used to define I/O Modules (or FTAs) and their
terminal arrangements:
To access the I/O Module Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of
the Home tab.
Select I/O Module Catalogue from the list of grids that is then displayed. The catalogue grid
is then displayed:

Note: Only those modules with their Allow Use checkbox column checked will be available
for use when creating I/O Modules.

Importing Catalogue Data


I/O Modules may be imported from another Wiring Manager project. In the Import section of
the Manage tab, click From Other Project.
Refer to Importing Catalogue Items from another Project for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:71 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Add a Catalogue I/O Module


To add an I/O Module to the project I/O Module Catalogue, open the I/O Module Catalogue
and click New in the Records section of the Home tab. The I/O Module Definition window
is displayed:

Check the Allow Use checkbox as appropriate. Only those modules with their Allow Use
checkbox checked will be available for use when creating I/O Modules.
Enter an I/O Type, manufacturer, model number and description.
The Description on Drawing field can be used to change the default drawing description to
the value entered in this field. Using the <Enter> key will add a line-break in the drawing to
create multiple lines of text. Up to three lines can be created for the description in both
AutoCAD termination diagrams created in Wiring Manager Designer and Termination PDF
reports created in Wiring Manager. If this field is left empty the default description will be
used, which is the Manufacturer and Model No. separated a space.

Define the I/O Module Points


Enter the number of points in the No. of Points (Channels) field. Enter the number of
terminals per point in the Terminals per Point field.
Changing either of the Point quantities makes Wiring Manager refresh the graphic
representation, as shown below:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:72 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Define the I/O Module Terminal Markings


Click in the first terminal and enter the terminal marking value. Repeat for all terminals.

Note: Users may use the <Tab> key to jump between terminals and use the scroll bar to
access all terminals.

Note: Users can set a Terminal to be a 'Plug and Socket' or 'Normal' terminal by right-
clicking and setting the Terminal Type. This may be useful to show a Plug and
Socket connection to a DCS or PLC system. Plug and Socket terminals are shown
on Wiring Manager termination reports and Wiring Manager Designer's AutoCAD
termination drawings.

Wiring Manager also enables additional terminals to be defined, such as those requiring a
power supply, earth, field bus termination etc. To add additional terminals, enter the
required number of additional terminals in the Additional Terminals section. Additional
Terminals are always added to the right side of the I/O module.

Share Catalogue I/O Module with Instrumentation


If the catalogue I/O Module is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation click Share the IO
Module with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

Note: I/O Modules shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA
Instrumentation but not edited.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:73 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

Edit a Catalogue I/O Module


To edit an I/O Module, open the I/O Module Catalogue and click Edit in the Records section
of the Home tab, or double-click on the I/O Module record in the grid. The I/O Module
Definition window is displayed:

Change the details of the device as required. See Add a Catalogue I/O Module for details.

Redefine the I/O Module Points


Enter the number of points in the No. of Points (Channels) field. Enter the number of
terminals per point in the Terminals per Point field.
Changing either of the Point quantities makes Wiring Manager refresh the graphic
representation
To edit terminal markings select a terminal in the graphic and enter the new value.

Note: Users may use the <Tab> key to jump between terminals and use the scroll bar to
access terminals if they are not viewable.

Important: Changing the number of terminals and/or terminal markings will update all I/O
modules used throughout the project using the current Catalogue I/O module's
new definition.

4.14.5 Importing Catalogue Items from another Project


Items for the following catalogues can be imported from another AVEVA Electrical project in
a multi-project environment:
• Field Device

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:74 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

• Device
• I/O Module
• Cable
Note that only new items, i.e. items not in the current catalogue, can be imported using this
procedure. Existing catalogue items cannot be updated or overwritten by an import.
With the appropriate Catalogue open, click From Other Project in the Import section of the
Manage tab. The Select Project window is then displayed. In this window, select the project
from which the catalogue instruments are to be imported.
The following message is then displayed:

Click Yes to proceed with the import.


The import then takes place. A message is displayed when the import is complete. The
imported items are added to the catalogue grid.
A window is then displayed listing any items that were not imported because they already
exist in the current project:

Click OK to close the window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:75 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Equipment

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 4:76 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

5 Cables

All project cables can be viewed, added and edited using the Cable Schedule grid. See
Create a New Project Cable, Select Catalogue Cable, Select Cable Ends, Copying Cables,
Edit Project Cable Data and Delete Cables.
Project cables are all based on a catalogue of cable definitions created for the project. See
Cable Catalogue for details. See also Change Cable Definitions.
Wiring Manager also includes facilities to assign cable glands and cable gland adaptors
(see Assign Cable Glands and Assign Cable Gland Adaptors) which are also based on
catalogues items (see Cable Glands and Cable Gland Adapters).
Facilities are also provided to merge cables (see Merge Cables), drum cables (see Cable
Drums), and import cable details from external sources (see Import Cables from Excel and
AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface).

5.1 Cable Schedule


The Cable Schedule is used to add/edit and view all project cables and allows definition of
cable type from the Cable Catalogue. Users may also edit specific cable data such as Cable
Number, Length and assign From and To equipment etc.
In AVEVA Electrical, all project cables must be based on a catalogue cable. This ensures
the project cable properties (size, number of cores, type etc) are consistent with a 'real'
cable. Users can reassign another catalogue cable to any project cable at any time. This
changes the project cable to have the properties (size, number of cores, core markings, type
etc) of the newly assigned catalogue cable, keeping current terminations for the original
cable.
To open the Cable Schedule, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home
tab.
Select Cable Schedule from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Cable Schedule grid
is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

By default all cables for the project are shown in the grid. Users may use the Filter by Area
list in the List Tools tab to filter the Cable Schedule by plant area.
All fields except those with a yellow background can be edited directly within the grid.
For information on Grid functionality refer to Working with the Data Grid.

Cable Schedule Layout


The Cable Schedule grid layout can be set by the user using the Wiring Manager Grid
Manager utility (select Manager in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home tab). The
Grid Manager allows users to define Views, that is, which fields should be viewable in the
Cable Schedule grid, their default position (column order), column size, default sort order
and whether a data filter is applied (e.g. Show only 'New' cables). New Grid Views can be
saved for use by individuals or for entire project teams and existing Views selected. Refer to
Grid Manager for more information.

Accessing Cable Terminations Data


Clicking on the From or To cell buttons that appear when the mouse is hovered over that
cell displays the Options window.

The options are as follows:


• Edit Detail: Displays the Equipment Layout window, used to design and view the
component layout of the equipment at the selected cable end. See Equipment Layout.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

• Edit Terminations: Displays the Terminations window, used to edit terminations of


the equipment at the selected cable end. See Terminations User Interface.
• View Terminations (Print Preview): Displays the Terminations Report print preview
window. See Termination Reports.
• Change 'To' / 'From' Equipment: Used to change a cable destination (either 'To' or
'From' depending on which cell is selected). See Select Cable Ends.

Select Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adapters


Clicking on the Gland (From) or Gland (To) cell buttons that appear when the mouse is
hovered over that cell displays the Select Cable Gland window. See Assign Cable Glands.
Clicking on the Adapter (From) or Adapter (To) cell buttons that appear when the mouse is
hovered over that cell displays the Select Cable Gland Adapter window. See Assign Cable
Gland Adaptors.

Drum Cables
A cable may be added to a drum by clicking the button that is displayed in the Drum No cell
when the mouse is hovered over it. The Select Cable Drum window is displayed. See
Assign Cables to Drums from the Cable Schedule.

Cables Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation


Cables created in AVEVA Electrical can be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation and vice
versa.
If the Show cables from both Instrumentation and Electrical checkbox on the Options
window is checked (this is the default setting), cables from Instrumentation shared with
Electrical will be listed in the Cable Schedule. They will be “greyed out”.
Whether or not a cable is shared, and if so, which application it was created in is displayed
in the Discipline column:
• If a cable is not shared, the discipline will be “Electrical”.
• If a cable is shared and was created in Electrical the discipline will be “Elect(Shared)”.
• If a cable is shared and was created in Instrumentation the discipline will be
“Inst(Shared)”.

A shared cable may be viewed in either application but may only be edited in the application
in which it was created.

Sizing, Drumming, Routing Status and Frozen Indicators


The default grid includes columns containing checkbox indicating:
• Whether or not cables have been sized.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

• Whether or not they need re-sizing as a result of changes made that may affect the size
of cable required. Refer to Cable Sizing for more information on sizing cables.
• Whether or not cables have been drummed.
• Whether or not cables have been drummed and the drum is locked. Refer to Cable
Drums for further information on drumming.
• Cable Routed Status, e.g. Routed, Un-Routed, Check Route, etc.
• If a cable is routed, the nodes its route passes through. Routing and routing status
information is passed to and from E3D via the Cable Design Data interface. Refer to
AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface for further information.
• Whether or not cables have been frozen (meaning they cannot be edited). Refer to
Freeze a Cable for further information.

Cable Schedule - List Tools Options


The following options are located on the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Filter by Area Used to filter the grid to display only those cables that have a
source and/or destination in the area selected from the drop-down
list.

Auto Ferrule Used to automatically add ferrule numbers to the wire ends of
selected Cables selected in accordance with pre-defined numbering rules.
Accesses a sub-menu from where the left, right or both ends of the
cables can be selected for numbering. Refer to Updating Ferrule
Nos by Ferrule Rules for further information.

Auto Cable Displays the Auto-Cable Drumming Options window, used to


Drum selected assign cables to cable drums using an algorithm to minimise any
Cables unused cable based on each cable's length and the catalogue
drum length. Refer to Auto-Cable Drumming for further information.

Tools Section

Change Enables the changing of Catalogue Numbers for selected cables.


Catalogue No. All selected cables have their properties (including number of
for selected cores and their markings etc) changed to be identical to the new
Cables Catalogue No selected. Refer to Select Catalogue Cable.

Merge Cables Displays a window that enables merging of two cables into one.
Cables must have same source (From) and destinations (To) in the
cable schedule and must have the same basic core groupings type
(cores, pairs, triads or quads). Refer to Merge Cables.

Size Selected Used to calculate cable sizes. Refer to Calculate Single Cable Size
Cables or Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Cable Sizing Used to open a report showing the differences between current
Check and sized cable sizing related values for selected cables. Refer to
Cable Sizing Check Report for details.

Update Estimate Used to update the estimate lengths of cables as entered in


Length Electrical with the design lengths imported from AVEVA Cable
Design. Refer to Update Estimated Cable Lengths with Design
Lengths for details.

Bulk Cable Used to freeze multiple cables selected in the grid. Refer to Bulk
Freeze Freeze and Unfreeze Cables for details.

Bulk Cable Used to unfreeze multiple cables selected in the grid. Refer to Bulk
Unfreeze Freeze and Unfreeze Cables for details.

Reports Section

Cable Sizing Opens the Report Manager, from which a cable sizing report can
Report be generated.

5.2 Create a New Project Cable


To add a new Cable to the project, open the Cable Schedule grid and click New in the
Records section of the Home tab.
The Cable Details window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Cables can also be created by:


• Selecting the Add New Cable toolbar option in the Terminations window. Refer to Tab
Commands.
• Using facilities provided by the Cable Block Diagrams application. Refer to Create a
New Project Cable.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: Catalogue specific data (fields shown with a yellow background above) cannot be
changed in this window. This data is specific to the catalogue cable that has been
chosen.

Note: Cable length units are set for the current project using the Options window.

Enter the cable number. At a minimum, a catalogue cable must also be specified (see
below).
Enter other data, such the cable source and destination and the estimated length of the
cable as required.

Note: The actual design length of the cable can be imported from AVEVA Cable Design.
The design length can then be used to update the estimated length if required. See
below for more details.

Cable Destinations
Select the equipment at each end of the cable by clicking on the small button at the right
side of the From and To fields. The Select Equipment window is then displayed. See
Select Cable Ends.

Cable Definition from the Cable Catalogue


To select a Cable Catalogue, click on the small button at the right side of the Catalogue No:
field to display the Select a Cable from Catalogue window (see Select Catalogue Cable).
After selection of a catalogue cable, the Catalogue data is copied into the catalogue specific
data fields (shown with a yellow background) in the Cable Details window.

Cable Gland Selection


To select a cable gland double-click in either the From or To Glands fields in the Cable
Details window. This displays the Select Cable Gland window, listing of all glands that can
fit the current catalogue cable based on cable Outside Diameter and gland minimum and
maximum diameter. See Assign Cable Glands.

Cable Gland Adapter Selection


To select a cable gland adapter double-click in either the From or To Adapter fields in the
Cable Details window. This displays the Select Cable Gland Adapter window which lists
of all gland adapters that can fit the current cable gland based on gland connection thread.
See Assign Cable Gland Adaptors.

AVEVA Cable Design Interface


Cable design data, including the design length of cables in AVEVA Cable Design, can be
imported and displayed this section. Refer to AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface.
Once the import has taken place, the Design Length and Cable Free Length fields are
completed and the Route Path field may be updated as appropriate.

Note: Once imported, the design length can be used to update the estimated length of the
cable if required. Refer to Update Estimated Cable Lengths with Design Lengths for
details.

If the cable is routed in E3D, details of the nodes the cable route passes through can be
viewed by clicking Route Path. The Cable Route Node List window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Create Multiple Single Core Cables


The window can be used to create multiple single core cables to represent a single power
multi-core cable, e.g. three single core cables instead of one three-core cable.
If a single core catalogue cable is selected, additional fields are displayed in the window:

Select the number of additional single core cables to be created from the Number of
Cables list. When the new cable is saved, that number of additional “child” cables, identical
to the parent cable are created automatically.
The number of the parent cable will automatically be suffixed with “-1”. The numbers of child
cables will be the number of the parent cable suffixed with “-2”, “-3” etc. If a parent cable is
renamed, its child cables will be renamed in the same way.

Other Data
Other cable data, for example sizing data, can be viewed by clicking the Other Data tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Cable Core Data


The cable's cores (and their core types) can be viewed (once a catalogue cable has been
selected) on the View Cores tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: Deleting a cable automatically disconnects all its cores.

Freeze a Cable
If a cable is “frozen” it cannot be edited either in AVEVA Electrical, or in E3D (Cable Design).
Its routing status is set to “Frozen”.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To freeze a cable check the Frozen checkbox.

Note: Cables can also be frozen (and unfrozen) in bulk. Refer to Bulk Freeze and Unfreeze
Cables for details.

Note: Cables on locked drums (refer to Cable Drums for details) cannot be frozen or
unfrozen.

If a cable is frozen, when a user opens the Cable Details window for that cable, a message
is first displayed warning that the cable is frozen and cannot be edited. The window then
opens, but the OK and Apply buttons are disabled meaning that no changes can be saved.
To unfreeze a cable, uncheck the Frozen checkbox. The OK and Apply buttons are then
enabled.

5.3 Select Catalogue Cable


By basing all cables on standard predefined catalogue cables Wiring Manager is enforces
data integrity by ensuring all cables using the same catalogue number are identical in
physical properties such as number or cores, core markings, screen/shield configuration,
diameter etc.
The Select a Cable from Catalogue window is used to select a catalogue cable definition
for any project cable. It is accessed by clicking the button in the Catalogue No: field on the
Cable Details window, or by selecting Change Catalogue No. for selected Cables in the
Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.

Note: Only those cables in the Cable Catalogue that have been marked with 'Allow Use'
are shown in this selection list. 'Allow Use' pre-filters the catalogue cables that can
be used for the current project. Refer to Cable Catalogue for more information.

Select a Cable from the Cable Catalogue


Either, double-click on the desired cable, or click on the desired cable record and click
Select.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Once the cable is selected, all cores with their predefined markings are created in the
database by copying the catalogue cable definition from the Cable Catalogue.
Users may filter the cable catalogue by using any combination of column filters: Class,
Manufacturer, Type, No. of cores, core size, armoured, Shields/Screen requirements etc.
Wiring Manager will remember the last selection throughout the current Wiring Manager
session.

5.4 Select Cable Ends


To define an end (from or to / source or destination) for a cable, in the Cable Detail window,
click on the button in the From or To field.

Or, in the Cable Schedule grid, click on the buttons that are displayed when the mouse is
hovered over the From or To cells, and select the Change ‘From/To’ Equipment option
from the Options window that is then displayed.

The Select Equipment window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To select an equipment tag, double-click on the required tag, or click on it and then click
Select. The window is then closed and the number of the specified equipment is displayed
in the cell.
To create a new equipment tag, select New. The Equipment Information window is then
displayed. Create the new equipment as described in Create New Equipment. The new
equipment is then added to the list in the Select Equipment window.
To exit the window without selecting destination equipment, or to de-select destination
equipment previously selected so that the other end of the cable is no longer connected,
click Not Connected.

5.4.1 Create New Equipment


When selecting equipment for cable ends, new equipment can be created by clicking the
New button on the Select Equipment window.
The Equipment Information window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Specify the Plant Area No and Equipment Type.


If PLC Cabinet or Local Control Station is selected from the Equipment Type list, click the
Equipment No. button which then becomes enabled. If Field Device is selected from the
Equipment Type list, click the button next to the Equipment Type list, which then becomes
enabled.
Whichever button is selected, the Equipment Tag window is then displayed. Complete it as
described in Add Equipment.
All other fields are optional. On saving, Wiring Manager will check that the Equipment No. is
unique for the project.
Many of the fields in these windows may be completed by copying data from the Major
Equipment Catalogue. This facility is accessed using the From Catalogue button, as
described below.
The Termination Drawing Required checkbox enables the equipment to be registered with
the AVEVA Electrical Designer's Drawing List, so that a CAD termination drawing can be
created for the equipment's terminations.
The Signal Class Applies and Signal Service Applies checkboxes are for reference
purposes only. There is no limit to the cables or field devices that can be assigned or
terminated to/at the equipment. They can be used, for example, to help the designer or
engineer flag analog signals to be used in the equipment.
If the equipment is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation, click Share the Equipment
with Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: Equipment shared with AVEVA Instrumentation can be viewed in AVEVA


Instrumentation but not edited.

Copying Equipment from the Major Equipment Catalogue


Prior to saving, a standard equipment configuration can be copied to the equipment from
those defined in the Major Equipment Catalogue.
Click the From Catalogue button. The Select Equipment window is then displayed:

To select a catalogue equipment, double-click on the equipment record or select the


equipment record and click Select.
New equipment created from catalogue equipment will contain the terminal strips and
terminals (including terminal markings) of the selected catalogue equipment. (after the Save
button is clicked in the original Equipment detail window).

5.5 Copying Cables


Any existing cable can be copied by selecting the cable to copy in the Cable Schedule then
clicking the pull-down menu button next to the New button on the Home tab, and clicking on
the Copy Selected command. The Cable Details window is then displayed, completed with
details of the copied cable. Change the Cable Number (which must be unique in the
project), and other details as required (see Edit Project Cable Data).
Cables (and their terminations) may also be copied using the Copy (with 'From' cables)
option on the Equipment View right-click menu. See Copy Equipment with Cables and
Terminations for details.
If a parent cable is copied a message asking whether or not its child cables are also to be
copied is displayed, for example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Yes if copies of the child cables are also required or No if only the parent cable is to be
copied.

5.6 Edit Project Cable Data


To edit an existing cable, open the Cable Schedule and then select the cable record and
click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab, or double-click on the cable record.
The Cable Details window is then displayed.

Note: If more than one cable is selected when the Edit option is clicked, Wiring Manager
asks if a 'Bulk Edit' is required. This enables the editing of multiple cables at a time.
See Bulk Edit Cables.

Note: Cable details can also be accessed for editing from the Cable Block Diagrams
application.

Note: If a cable is on a locked drum (refer to Cable Drums for details), it cannot be edited.
The OK and Apply buttons are disabled on Cable Details window the meaning that
no changes can be saved.

Note: If a cable is frozen, when a user opens the Cable Details window for that cable, a
message is first displayed warning that the cable is frozen and cannot be edited. The
window then opens, but the OK and Apply buttons are disabled meaning that no
changes can be saved.
To unfreeze a cable, uncheck the Frozen checkbox. The OK and Apply buttons are
then enabled.
Cables on locked drums (see above) cannot be frozen or unfrozen.

If a “child” cable is selected for editing (see Create Multiple Single Core Cables), the
following message is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Yes to open the Cable Details window for the parent cable. Editing the parent
cable will result in the child cable being edited in the same way.
Click No to open the Cable Details window for the child cable. Child cable details can
be viewed but not edited.

For information on the implications of changing a cables catalogue cable, see below.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

For details of how to complete or amend other cable details, refer to Create a New Project
Cable.
To view a cable's terminations, click View Terminations. A preview terminations report for
the cable is then displayed. Refer to Termination Reports for details.

Changing a Cable's Catalogue Cable


Users can change a project cables definition by selecting a new catalogue cable from the
Cable Catalogue. If a cable has its catalogue cable changed, when saved the cable's cores
are automatically updated:
• All existing core are re-aligned to the new cables core type and core markings.
• Any additional cores are added to the cable (e.g. change from a 1 pair to a 2 pair) and
all core terminations are retained.
• Any surplus cores are removed (e.g. change a 12 pair to a 8 pair). All terminations are
retained, except for cores that are being removed.
• If the cable type changes (e.g. change a 2 core + E to 1 pair OAS), cores are aligned
based on core type (valid core types in Wiring Manager are C - cored, E - Earth, OAS -
Overall Screen or Shield, S - Group or Individual Screen or Shield). For the example
given: old core 1 becomes new core 1 since core types are the same and termination is
retained, old core 2 becomes new core 2 and termination is retained. The Earth core is
deleted, since it does not match the core type of OAS. A new core is added for the
OAS.
Note: If a catalogue definition is changed in the Cable Catalogue all the project instances
are changed to the new definition.

5.6.1 Bulk Edit Cables


Some data for multiple cables can be edited at the same time.
In the Cable Schedule grid, select the multiple cable records, then click Edit in the Records
section of the Home tab. A message is displayed:

Note: Frozen cables, and cables on locked drums cannot be edited. Changes will not be
saved to such cables. A message is displayed to inform users of this.

Click Yes.
If a “child” cable is selected for editing (see Create Multiple Single Core Cables), a message
is displayed to inform the user of this and the procedure is cancelled.
Otherwise the Multi Field Edit (Bulk Edit) window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Check the Select checkbox for all columns to be edited.


Enter the new values required in the Value columns.
The Copy first record's Data option will copy the data from first record in selection into the
window ready for editing. The data is not actually copied to the selected cables unless the
Select checkbox is selected and the Save button is clicked.
Click Save to save the changes.

5.7 Delete Cables


Delete cables by selecting them from the Cable Schedule grid, then click Delete in the
Records section of the Home tab. Multiple cables may be selected for deletion.
If a single cable is selected:
• If that cable is frozen or on a locked drum, a message is displayed to inform the user
that the cable cannot be deleted.
• If the cable can be deleted, a message is then displayed requesting that the deletion of
the selected cable(s) be confirm. Click Yes to continue.
If multiple cables are selected, a message is displayed requested that the user confirm that
these cables are to be deleted. Click Yes to continue.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

A message is displayed to inform the user that frozen cables and cables on locked drums
cannot be deleted. Click OK. The cables that can be deleted are then deleted.

Note: Deleting a cable automatically disconnects all its cores.

A child cable (see Create Multiple Single Core Cables) cannot be deleted without also
deleting its parent cable and vice versa. If a parent of child cable is selected for deletion a
message is displayed to inform the user of this:

Click Yes to delete the entire group of cables, or No to cancel the deletion.
To remove a child cable without deleting the parent cable, reduce the number of child cables
that the parent cable has in the Number of Cables field of the Cable Details window.

5.8 Change Cable Definitions


In Wiring Manager, all project cables are based on a cable catalogue definition. This
ensures that project cable properties (size, number of cores, core markings, type etc) are
consistent with a 'real' cable.
Users can reassign another catalogue cable to any project cable at any time. This changes
the project cable to have the properties (size, number of cores, core markings, type etc) of
the newly assigned catalogue cable, keeping current terminations for the original cable.
After a cable has been created (and/or terminated), users may change a cable's definition
on a cable by cable basis by using the Cable Details window. However, in case multiple
cables need to be changed then Wiring Manager provides a facility for a 'batch' update of
cable definitions.
To change the assigned cable catalogue for multiple cables, from the Cable Schedule grid,
select each cable record that is to be updated, then select Change Catalogue No. for
selected Cables in the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

This displays the Select a Cable from Catalogue window:

Note: Only those cables in the Cable Catalogue that have been marked with 'Allow Use'
are shown in this selection list. 'Allow Use' pre-filters the catalogue cables that can
be used for the current project. Refer to Cable Catalogue for more information.

To select a new cable type from the Cable Catalogue, either double-click on the desired
cable or select the desired catalogue cable record and click Select.
The new Catalogue Cable definition will be applied to the selected cables in the Cable
Schedule.

Note: Frozen cables, and cables on locked drums cannot be edited. Changes will not be
saved to such cables. A message is displayed to inform users of this.

Selecting a new Catalogue definition will automatically update the Cable Schedule and each
cables terminations (if any) including changing core markings:
• All existing core are re-aligned to the new cables core type and core markings.
• Any additional cores are added to the cable (e.g. change from a 1 pair to a 2 pair) and
all core terminations are retained.
• Any surplus cores are removed (e.g. change a 12 pair to a 8 pair). All terminations are
retained, except for cores that are being removed.
• If the cable type changes (e.g. change a 2 core + E to 1 pair OAS), cores are aligned
based on core type (valid core types in Wiring Manager are C - cored, E - Earth, OAS -
Overall Screen or Shield, S - Group or Individual Screen or Shield). For the example
given: old core 1 becomes new core 1 since core types are the same and termination is
retained, old core 2 becomes new core 2 and termination is retained. The Earth core is
deleted, since it doesn't match the core type of OAS. A new core is added for the OAS.
Note: If a catalogue definition is changed in the Cable Catalogue all the project instances
are changed to the new definition automatically ensuring design integrity.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

5.9 Assign Cable Glands


To assign a cable gland to a project cable, either double-click in the From or To Glands
fields in the Cable Details window, or in the Cable Schedule grid, click the buttons that are
displayed when the mouse is hovered over those fields.
The Select Cable Gland window is then displayed.

The window displays a list of all glands that can fit the current catalogue cable based on
cable Outside Diameter and gland minimum and maximum diameter (a catalogue cable
must therefore be assigned before glands are assigned).
The current cable details are shown in the top text boxes (yellow background).
Wiring Manager filters the cable glands by checking whether the cable outside diameter
(Cable OD) defined in the cable catalogue fits within the minimum and maximum OD values
in the gland catalogue properties. Wiring Manager also checks the 'Armoured' flag of the
cable type with that of the gland (i.e. Armoured cables use Armoured glands and vice
versa).

Note: Cable Glands are added to a project and edited using the Cable Gland Catalogue
grid. Only glands from the Cable Gland Catalogue with 'Allow Use' set will be listed.

To select a Cable Gland, double-click on the cable gland record. or select the cable gland
record, then click Select.
To assign a selected Cable Gland to all cables with the same Cable Catalogue Number,
check the Apply to All cables with this Catalogue Number checkbox before selecting the
required gland.

5.10 Assign Cable Gland Adaptors


To assign a cable gland adaptor to a project cable, either double-click in the From or To
Adapter fields in the Cable Details window, or in the Cable Schedule grid, click the buttons
that are displayed when the mouse is hovered over those fields.
The Select Cable Gland Adapter window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

This displays a list of all gland adapters that can fit the current cable gland based on gland
connection thread (a cable gland must therefore be assigned before adapters are
assigned).
The current gland details are shown in the top text boxes (yellow background).

Note: Cable Gland Adaptors are added to a project and edited using the Cable Gland
Adapter Catalogue grid. Only gland adaptors from the Cable Gland Adaptor
Catalogue with 'Allow Use' set are listed.

To select a Cable Gland Adaptor, double-click on the adaptor record, or select the adaptor
record, then click Select.
To assign a selected Cable Gland to all glands with the same Gland Catalogue Number,
check the Apply to All cables with this Catalogue Number checkbox before selecting the
required adapter.

5.11 Merge Cables


Multiple cables can be merged into one.
Only cables that have same source (From) and destinations (To) in the cable schedule and
have the same basic core groupings type (cores, pairs, triads or quads) can be merged.
To merge cables, open the Cable Schedule grid and from the List Tools - Cable Schedule
tab, click Merge Cables in the Tools section.
If there are no cables suitable for merging in the grid, the following message is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

If there are cables that can be merged, the Merge Cables window is displayed:

The window lists all the source (From) and destinations (To) combinations of cables that can
be merged.
Click on the + symbol next to a source and destination row. The cables that can be merged
that share that source and destination combination are then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: Cables that are frozen or that are on a locked drum are not listed.

To select cables for merging, click their Select checkboxes. At least two cables that share a
source and destination combination must be selected.
When all required selections have taken place, click Merge.
All selected cables that share a source and destination combination are then merged.
The number of a merged cable will be that of the first selected cable within a source and
destination combination. For example, if the two cables listed in the screen example above
are merged, the merged cable number will be FD-11. Cable FD-12 will be deleted.

5.12 Import Cables from Excel


Wiring Manager supports importing of Cables into the Wiring Manager Cable Schedule from
an Excel spreadsheet. New cables can be imported, and existing cables updated in this
way.

Note: Cables that are frozen or that are on a locked drum cannot be updated.

To import Cables the Excel file must contain the following information at a minimum: Cable
No, Cable Catalogue No and 'From' and 'To' end equipment tags.
Since Wiring Manager Cables have several user properties (including user defined property
fields) users can also import additional data such as Length, Remarks, Notes into those
cable property fields by including that data in the Excel file being imported.

Important: Cables cannot be imported unless the Cable Catalogue Number (its catalogue
definition) already exists in the Wiring Manager Cable Catalogue since the
catalogue defines physical properties such as the core arrangement (number of

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

cores, pairs etc including shielding, core size, core markings/colours etc). In
addition a cable cannot be imported if its 'From' and 'To' end Equipment
Numbers/Tag Nos do not exist in the Wiring Manager Equipment List.

Prior to importing, the Excel Worksheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and
rows) and the first row should contain unique column names (headings) so that Wiring
Manager can identify the column's data to enable 'mapping' to Wiring Manager database
fields. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated. Wiring Manager
will only import column data that contains a heading, furthermore, the Excel file must contain
the following mandatory columns/data: Cable No, Cable Catalogue No, From and To.
Once an Excel Worksheet is formatted accordingly and selected for import, users must
'map' each Excel column name (heading) to an Wiring Manager database field using the
Wiring Manager import utility. Then data can be imported into Wiring Manager. The import
utility will check if mandatory columns exists in the Excel file and Mappings. While
processing cables to be imported, if a Cable No. already exists in the database Wiring
Manager will show the differences between the imported data and the Wiring Manager data,
allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and field by
field) basis. If the Cable does not exist in Wiring Manager and the user accepts to import,
Wiring Manager will create a new cable in the cable schedule including all its Catalogue
properties including core configuration and core markings/colours based on the Catalogue
No specified in the Excel data.

Import Excel Cable Schedule Data


Open the Cable Schedule and click From Excel in the Import section of the Manage tab.
This displays the Cable Schedule Import window as shown below:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Browse and locate the Excel Workbook file.


Click Next.
The next window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

Define a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Once the name and description for the mapping has been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.
Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may save time
to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed again.

Import the Data


Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
The import wizard will then perform data validation for the cables/data found in the Excel file.
If a Catalogue Number in the Excel data does not exist in Wiring Manager, then the next
wizard screen will list these and the cables associated with them in the file.

The wizard will then list cables with valid catalogue numbers:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

If cables are invalid for importing because of other reasons, these reasons will be displayed
in the Invalid Reason column.
Select the (valid) cables to be imported by clicking their Select checkboxes (Use the Select
all checkbox if required), click Next.
The import wizard will perform data validation for the cable ends ('From' and 'To') as defined
in the Excel file. If there are any issues with the data validation, for example an Equipment
Number in the Excel data does not exist in Wiring Manager, then the next wizard screen will
show a list of issues. If there are no issues the wizard will show a list of valid cables ready
for import once again.
Click Import.
The import wizard will then add any new Cables to the project, and update any existing
cables as required.

5.13 AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface


The design length of cables can be imported from AVEVA Cable Design (from E3D
projects), for comparison purposes with the lengths of cables as recorded in Wiring
Manager. The design lengths can be used to update the estimate lengths of cables if
required (see Update Estimated Cable Lengths with Design Lengths).
Route data is also transferred between E3D and Electrical: cable start and end data is
exported to E3D. From this the route of a cable can be established in E3D. This route data,

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

i.e. the cable way node points that a cable passes through is transferred back to Electrical
for information purposes.
As well as length and route data, cable status data is also passed between E3D and
Electrical, in both directions. The status of a cable indicates whether or not a cable has been
routed, drummed, drummed and locked, frozen, and whether the route needs to be
checked.
• 0 - Un-routed
• 1 - Routed
• 2 - Routing Failed
• 3 - Partially Routed
• 4 - Partially Failed
• 5 - Manually Routed
• 6 - Drummed
• 7 - Drummed Locked
• 8 - Check Route
• 9 - Cable Frozen
Design data can either be transferred for individual cables, or in bulk for multiple cables.

Note: Cables that are frozen or that are on a locked drum cannot be updated.

5.13.1 Cable Design Import Configuration


Before design data can be imported, the source of the import, whether or not the imported
lengths are to include excesses, and the route node delimiter must be specified.
On the Project tab, click Setup, then AVEVA Cable Design Import Configuration. The
AVEVA Cable Design Import window is then displayed.

Select the version of AVEVA Cable Design from which data is to be imported.
Select the delimiter used to separate route nodes when route data is displayed in Electrical,
e.g. “NewLine” or a character.
If cable excesses are to be excluded from imports, click the Total Length of Cable
Excluding Excesses button. If excesses are to be included, click the Total Length of
Cable button.
Click OK.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

5.13.2 Import the Design Data for Multiple Cables


Open the Cable Schedule grid and click AVEVA Cable Design Import in the Integration
section of the Manage tab.
If the user has not previously logged-on to a AVEVA Cable Design database during the
current session, the AVEVA Cable Design Login window is then displayed:

Enter the identifiers of the project and project database from which lengths are to be
imported, and a valid username and password. Click OK to connect to the selected
database.
Only those databases that are of the AVEVA Cable Design version selected in the
configuration dialog may be connected to. Refer to Cable Design Import Configuration.
If the user has previously logged-on to a AVEVA Cable Design database during the current
session, the dialog is not displayed.
The cable data in the database is then examined and compared to that in the AVEVA
Electrical database. A progress bar is then displayed, followed by the results of this process:

This window shows:


• No of Cables: Which shows the number of cables in the E3D project.
• Matched AVEVA Application Cables: Shows the number of AVEVA Electrical cables
available in Cable Design.
• Cable Data Changed: Shows the number AVEVA Electrical cables available in Cable
Design that have changed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

• Cable Data Unchanged: Shows the number AVEVA Electrical cables available in
Cable Design that not have changed.
Cable design data may now be imported one by one or in a batch. The batch option
processes all records together then displays a differences report enabling the user to accept
or reject each change for each cable. The one by one option displays a differences report
for each cable record, one at a time.
Click either Process one by one or Batch process all as required.
AVEVA Electrical then process the data and show any differences in the Import Cable
Lengths Differences window:

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

If the one by one option was selected, the differences for a single cable are listed. If the
batch option was selected, differences for all cables are displayed.
The left-hand pane lists the cable or cables and displays the cable number in AVEVA
Electrical, the cable number in AVEVA Cable Design, the cable design length of each cable,
the route nodes and the route status.
The right-hand pane displays the differences between cable data in AVEVA Electrical and
AVEVA Cable Design for the cable currently selected in the left-hand pane.
To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will
be autoselected).
To import the checked (accepted) data, click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next cable record, if there is one.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next cable record, if there is one.

Note: To cancel all further importing click Stop Import.

After the import is complete, a log of the imported document details is displayed:

Click Close the exit the import wizard.


The design lengths of the cables are then displayed in the Design Length field on the Other
Data tab of the Cable Details window.

5.13.3 Import the Design Data of Single Cables


To import the design length and other design data for a single cable, from the Cable
Schedule, select the cable record then, click Edit or double-click on it. The Cable Details
window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To import the design data of the cable from AVEVA Cable Design, click the button next to the
Design Length field.
If the user has not previously logged-on to a AVEVA Cable Design database during the
current session, the AVEVA Cable Design Login window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Enter the identifiers of the project and project database from which the data is to be
imported, and a valid username and password. Click OK to connect to the selected
database.
Only those databases that are of the AVEVA Cable Design version selected in the
configuration dialog may be connected to. Refer to Cable Design Import Configuration.
If the user has previously logged-on to a AVEVA Cable Design database during the current
session, the window is not displayed.
If the cable data in AVEVA Cable Design does not match that in AVEVA Electrical, the
differences are displayed in the Import Cable Lengths Differences window:

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The left-hand pane displays the cable number in AVEVA Electrical, the cable number in
AVEVA Cable Design and the cable design length of the cable.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

The right-hand pane displays the differences between cable data in AVEVA Electrical and
AVEVA Cable Design.
To accept the changes click either the Accept checkbox, or select the Accept All checkbox
at the top of this window.
To import the data, click Save.
The import then takes place.
If there are no difference between the cable data in AVEVA Electrical and AVEVA Cable
Design the Import Cable Lengths Differences window is not displayed and the import
takes place immediately.
Once the import is complete, the design length of the cable is displayed in the Design
Length field.

5.13.4 Update Estimated Cable Lengths with Design Lengths


The estimate lengths of cables as entered in Electrical can be updated with the design
lengths imported from AVEVA Cable Design (as described in AVEVA Cable Design Data
Interface).
Click Update Estimated Length from the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule
tab. The Update Estimated Length window is then displayed:

The window lists all cables that have been routed and have different estimated and design
lengths. These lengths are displayed in the window.
Select which cables to update by checking the appropriate Select checkboxes.
Once the cables have been selected, click Update Length. The estimated lengths of the
selected cables are then changed to their design lengths.

5.14 Bulk Freeze and Unfreeze Cables


If a cable is “frozen” it cannot be edited either in AVEVA Electrical, or in E3D (Cable Design).
Its routing status is set to “Frozen”.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

If a cable is frozen, when a user opens the Cable Details window for that cable, a message
is first displayed warning that the cable is frozen and cannot be edited. The window then
opens, but the OK and Apply buttons are disabled meaning that no changes can be saved.
Cables can also be frozen (and unfrozen) in individually. Refer to Freeze a Cable for details.
Cables can also be frozen and unfrozen in bulk, i.e. multiple cables can be frozen or
unfrozen at the same time.
To freeze multiple cables, select the cables in question in the Cable Schedule grid, then
click Bulk Cable Freeze from the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.
To unfreeze multiple cables, select the cables in question in the Cable Schedule grid, then
click Bulk Cable Unfreeze from the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.
Cables that are on a locked drum (refer to Cable Drums for details) cannot be frozen or
unfrozen. A message will be displayed to inform the user of this:

The selected cables (other than those on locked drums) are then frozen or unfrozen as
appropriate.

5.15 Find Cable Cores Not Terminated


To get a list of all cable cores that are not yet terminated, click Fixed Reports on the Home
tab then select the Cable Cores Not Terminated option from the menu that is then
displayed. The Show Cable Cores Not Terminated window is then displayed.

Initially no data is displayed.


To view the cable cores not terminated, select a plant area from the Plant Area list, then
select a cable end from the At Cable End list:
To ignore Overall screens/shields from the Ignore OAS checkbox:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To ignore All screens/shields from the Ignore All Screens/Shields checkbox:

Note: These two options excludes respective screens and shields from the list.

Click Get Cables to populate the window with the list of cable cores that are not yet
terminated:

Click on the 'From' or 'To' cell command button that is displayed when the mouse cursor is
hovered over one of these cells. The Terminations window is then displayed, which is used
for editing terminations. See Terminations User Interface.

5.16 Cable Catalogue


The Cable Catalogue is used to view all catalogue cables and allows definition of
manufacturers cable properties such as catalogue number, manufacturer, cable type (cores,
pairs, triads), number of cores, pairs or triads, core markings, core size, whether the cable
has screens/shields, earth core, armoured etc, its outer diameter, weight, conductivity etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

In AVEVA Electrical all project cables must be based on a catalogue cable. This ensures
that project cable properties (size, number of cores, type etc) consistent with a 'real' cable.
User can reassign another catalogue cable to any project cable at any time. This changes
the project cable to have the properties (size, number of cores, type, core markings etc) of
the newly assigned catalogue cable, keeping current terminations for the original cable.
To open the Cable Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.
Select Cables from under the Catalogue heading in the list of grids that is then displayed.
The Cable Catalogue grid is then displayed:

Note: Only those cables with their AllowUse checkbox checked will be available for use
when working in the project Cable Schedule. Although the cable catalogue can hold
thousands of standard cables from various manufacturers, 'Allow' filters only specific
cables for use on the project.

For information on grid functionality refer to Working with the Data Grid topic.

5.16.1 Add Cables to the Catalogue


To add a new Cable to the project Cable Catalogue, open the Cable Catalogue grid and
click New from the Records section of the Home tab.

Note: Wiring Manager also provides facilities for importing of Catalogue Cables from
another project. Refer to Importing Catalogue Items from another Project.

The Catalogue Cable Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Check the Allow use on Project checkbox if the catalogue cable is to be available for use
in the project, i.e listed in the Cable Schedule etc. The checkbox is checked by default.

Note: Only those cables with their Allow use on Project checkbox checked will be
available for use when working in the project Cable Schedule. Although the cable
catalogue can hold thousands of standard cables from various manufacturers, 'Allow'
filters only specific cables for use on the project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Cable Data Fields

Class Used to help segregate cables in the Catalogue. Valid values


include Instrument, Control, Power, Thermocouple etc.

Manufacturer/ These are used to define exact catalogue details for purchasing.
Catalogue No Catalogue number is mandatory and must be unique in the current
project.

User Code Used to enter a user part number as an alternative to the Catalogue
No for reports etc.

Cores The Cores section fields are used the define the cores/wires for a
catalogue cable.

Group Type Used to define the core grouping (Pair = 2 cores per group, Core = 1
core per group, Triad = 3 cores per group etc).
Cannot be changed for existing cables.

No. of Cores Used to enter the total number of cores, pairs, triads etc in this
catalogue cable.

Note: The number of cores entered may not exceed the number of
core group type markings specified in the Options window.

Core Size Used to define the core or conductor size (e.g. 1.5mm² or 12 AWG
etc) - do not enter the units here.

Units Used to enter the core size units (mm² or AWG) - the units picklist is
populated from unique units previously saved to the catalogue.

Screens/Shields This section is used to define the screens or shields used for signal
protection for multi-core cables.

OAS/Coll This checkbox is used to specify whether or not the entire cable a
single Overall Screen/Shield (Collective Outer Screen).

Group/Indiv This checkbox is used to specify whether or not each group (i.e.
Pair, Triad etc) has a group screen/shield (i.e. Individually
screened).

Armoured This checkbox is used to specify whether or not steel wire


armouring is used for this catalogue cable.

Earth Core This checkbox is used to specify whether or not an additional earth
core should be included in the cable in addition to cores/shields
defined.

Earth Core Size Used to define the earth core size.

Earth Core Units Used to define the earth core size units (mm² or AWG).

Voltage Range Used to enter the insulation voltage range.

Minimum Used to enter minimum voltage.

Maximum Used to enter maximum voltage.

Insulation Type Used to select the type of insulation.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Insulation Used to enter the insulation temperature.


Temperature

Insulation Level Used to enter the insulation level.

Colour Used to enter the outer sheath colour.

Description Used to enter a user definable text description.

Share the This checkbox is used to specify whether or not the catalogue cable
Catalogue Cable is to be shared with AVEVA Instrumentation.
with
Instrumentation Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for
the project the checkbox will be disabled. Sharing with
AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project
option). Refer to the Installation User Guide for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Design Data Fields

Additional catalogue data may be entered on this tab to aid design selection.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Notable fields on this tab are:

Outside Diameter This field is used by Wiring Manager to auto-select cable glands
from the Cable Gland Catalogue.

Drum Length This field is used by Wiring Manager when auto-cable drumming.
Wiring Manager will use this value as its default drum length.
See Auto-Cable Drumming.

Enhance Cable These fields are used to specify the appearance of cables using
Block Diagram the cable catalogue in Enhanced Cable Block Diagrams (see
fields Create or Edit Content of an Enhanced Cable Block Diagram).

All other fields are for user reference only and are currently not used for any purpose except
reporting.

Add a New Catalogue Cable


Enter values for all fields in the window, then click Save.
Wiring Manager will create the cable cores/wires based on the information provided using
default core markings. Users can then modify the core markings for this cable by clicking on
the View Cores tab. Refer to Change Cable Core Markings.

5.16.2 Edit Catalogue Cables


To edit a Catalogue Cable in the project, select the catalogue record from the Cable
Catalogue, then click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab, or double-click on the
catalogue cable record.
The Catalogue Cable Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

See Create a New Project Cable for details of the fields in this window.

To edit an existing Catalogue Cable


Change values any of the fields in the window as described above. Then click Save.
Wiring Manager will update the cable cores/wires based on the information provided using
core markings shown in the View Cores tab. Users can modify the core markings for this
cable by clicking on the View Cores tab. Refer to Change Cable Core Markings.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Important: Any changes that are made to the catalogue cable are also saved to any project
cables using this catalogue cable. By changing core markings, adding/removing
cores, screens/shields and/or earth cores of the catalogue cable all project
cables (using this catalogue cable) are updated to reflect the new catalogue
cable definition.

For example, changing marking '1W' to '1WH' will change the marking in project cable
instances that use this catalogue cable for every cable in the project. Or changing the
Manufacturer, Catalogue Number or other property will also change all details in the Cable
Schedule that use this Catalogue Cable.
Any additional cores will not be terminated; users will need to terminate those (if required).
Any cores removed will be disconnected prior to deletion. This is a very powerful feature of
Wiring Manager and users should take care when using it, as a single change here can
effect the whole project.

Note: The Group configuration (Pair, Triad etc) of a cable cannot be changed once it has
been created. Users will have to create a new catalogue cable if the group type
needs to change. This does not effect project cables, where a project cable's
configuration can be changed by selecting a new catalogue cable from the Cable
Catalogue. This limitation effects editing Catalogue Cable definitions only.

5.16.3 Change Cable Core Markings


To enter or edit the cable core markings of a catalogue cable, select the catalogue record
from the Cable Catalogue, then click Edit in the Records section of the Home tab, or
double-click on the catalogue cable record.

Note: Changing the core markings of a catalogue cable will result in the core markings for
every cable in the project that is based on this catalogue cable being changed as
well.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Only data in the Marking and CoreType columns may be edited.

Note: The core type is used by Wiring Manager when creating reports and terminations
OAS = Overall screen, S = screen/shield, E = Earth wire, C = Core (i.e. normal wire -
any core that is not a shield or earth wire).

Important: Wiring Manager uses a relational database to store information then any
change to core markings for a catalogue cable effect all project cables that use
this catalogue cable. For example, changing marking '1W' to '1WH' will change

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

the first core in project cable instances that use this catalogue cable for every
cable in the project.

Note: The default cable core colours/markings and core group type markings are set for
the project using the Cable Schedule Options window. These preferences are
applied to new catalogue cable creation only.

5.16.4 Importing Catalogue Cables


Importing Catalogue Cables from another Project
Catalogue cables can be imported from another AVEVA Electrical project. The procedure is
identical to that for importing Device and I/O Module catalogue items. Refer to Importing
Catalogue Items from another Project.
Importing Catalogue Cables from Excel
Catalogue cables can be imported from an Excel spreadsheet.
The Excel spreadsheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and rows) and the first
row should contain unique column names (headings) so that AVEVA Electrical can identify
the column's data. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated.
AVEVA Electrical will only import column data that contains a heading,
The Excel file must contain an identity column containing the Catalogue Number or
Catalogue Id of each cable. It must also include Group Type, Number of Groups, Group
Screen Required, Overall Screen Required and Earth Core columns.
Once an Excel spreadsheet is selected for import, users must 'map' each Excel column
name (heading) to an AVEVA Electrical database field using the AVEVA Electrical import
utility. Data can then be imported into AVEVA Electrical. The import utility will check if the
identity column field exists in mappings.
While processing records to be imported, if a record already exists in the database AVEVA
Electrical will show the differences between the imported data and the AVEVA Electrical
data, allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and
field by field) basis. If the record does not exist in AVEVA Electrical and the user accepts the
importation of the record, AVEVA Electrical will create a new record for that drawing or
catalogue item.
Open the Cable Catalogue. Select From Excel in the Import section of the Manage tab.
The Cable Catalogue Import window is then opened:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Browse and select the Excel file from which data is to be imported. Click Next >.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).
Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

Once the name and description for the mapping has been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Importing the Data


Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
A list of catalogue items in the spreadsheet that will not be imported because they are
invalid in some way in then displayed, along with the reason that they are invalid:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Next >.


A list of catalogue items which can be imported is then displayed.

To import a catalogue cable, check its Select checkbox. Check the Select all checkbox to
check all the Select checkboxes.
Click Next >.
The selected list of valid catalogue cables is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:53 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Import to proceed with the import. The import then takes place. After the import is
complete, a log of the imported catalogue cables is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:54 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Click Close the exit the import wizard.

5.17 Cable Glands and Cable Gland Adapters


The cable glands and cable gland adaptors that are assigned to cables are stored in project
catalogues. For details, refer to:
• Cable Gland Catalogue
• Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue
• Importing Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adaptor Catalogue Data from Excel

5.17.1 Cable Gland Catalogue


The Cable Gland Catalogue is used to view and edit all catalogue Cable Glands and allows
definition of manufacturers gland properties such as catalogue number, manufacturer,
material, thread, minimum and maximum size, whether suitable for armoured cables etc.
To open the Cable Gland Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.
Select Cable Glands from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Cable Gland
Catalogue grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:55 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: Only those cable glands with their Allow column checkbox checked will be available
for use when working in the project. Although the cable gland catalogue can hold
thousands of standard glands from various manufacturers, 'Allow' filters only specific
glands for use on the project.

For information on Grid functionality refer to Working with the Data Grid.
To create a new catalogue cable gland, open the Cable Gland Catalogue grid and click New
from the Records section of the Home tab.
The Cable Gland Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:56 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Enter the required details are click OK or Apply.


Make sure the Allow use on Project checkbox is checked if the gland is to be available for
selection in the project.
The Share the Cable Gland Details with AVEVA Instrumentation checkbox is used to
specify whether or not the catalogue cable gland is to be shared with AVEVA
Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

To edit cable gland details, open the Cable Gland Catalogue grid, select the gland record
from the grid and either click Edit from the Records section of the Home tab, or double-
click on the record.
The Cable Gland Detail window is then displayed. Edit the details are required.

5.17.2 Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue


The Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue is used to view and edit all catalogue Cable Gland
Adapters and allows definition of manufacturers adapter properties such as catalogue
number, thread, material etc.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:57 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To open the Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Cable Gland Adapters from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Cable Gland
Adapter Catalogue grid is then displayed:

Note: Only those cable gland adapters with their Allow column checkbox will be available
for use when working in the project. Although the cable gland adapter catalogue can
hold thousands of standard adapters from various manufacturers, 'Allow' filters only
specific adapters for use on the project.

For information on Grid functionality refer to Working with the Data Grid.
To create a new catalogue cable gland adapter, open the Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue
grid and click New from the Records section of the Home tab.
The Gland Adapter Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:58 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Enter the required details are click OK or Apply.


Make sure the Allow use on Project checkbox is checked if the gland adapter is to be
available for selection in the project.
The Share the Cable Gland Adapter with AVEVA Instrumentation checkbox is used to
specify whether or not the catalogue cable gland adapter is to be shared with AVEVA
Instrumentation.

Note: Unless sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation is enabled for the project the checkbox
will be disabled. Sharing with AVEVA Instrumentation may be enabled during project
setup, or afterwards (using the Project tab > Edit Project option). Refer to the
Installation User Guide for details.

To edit cable gland adapter details, open the Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue grid, select
the adapter record from the grid and either click Edit from the Records section of the Home
tab, or double-click on the record.
The Gland Adapter Detail window is then displayed. Edit the details are required.

5.17.3 Importing Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adaptor Catalogue Data from
Excel
Cable Gland Catalogue and Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue data can be imported from an
Excel spreadsheet.

Note: Cable Gland Catalogue and Cable Gland Adaptor Catalogue items can also be
imported from another AVEVA Electrical project. The procedure is identical to that for
importing Device and I/O Module catalogue items. Refer to Importing Catalogue
Items from another Project.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:59 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

The Excel Spreadsheet


The Excel spreadsheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and rows) and the first
row should contain unique column names (headings) so that AVEVA Electrical can identify
the column's data. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated.
AVEVA Electrical will only import column data that contains a heading,
The Excel file must contain an identity column containing the Catalogue Number or
Catalogue Id of each gland or gland adaptor.
Once an Excel spreadsheet is selected for import, users must 'map' each Excel column
name (heading) to an AVEVA Electrical database field using the AVEVA Electrical import
utility. Data can then be imported into AVEVA Electrical. The import utility will check if the
identity column field exists in mappings.
While processing records to be imported, if a record already exists in the database AVEVA
Electrical will show the differences between the imported data and the AVEVA Electrical
data, allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and
field by field) basis. If the record does not exist in AVEVA Electrical and the user accepts the
importation of the record, AVEVA Electrical will create a new record for that drawing or
catalogue item.

The Import Procedure


To import gland or gland adaptor catalogue data, open the appropriate grid (i.e. the Cable
Gland Catalogue or Cable Gland Adaptor Catalogue). Select From Excel in the Import
section of the Manage tab. The Cable Catalogue Import Wizard window is then opened
The Select excel workbook to import window is displayed:

Browse for the spreadsheet that data is to be imported from and click Open. The Import
Fields window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:60 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).
Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:61 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Importing the Data


To import the Excel data, click Import.
AVEVA Electrical will display the Import Options window from which the user may choose
to import reports one by one or in a batch. The batch option processes all records together
then displays a differences report enabling users to accept or reject each change. The one
by one option displays a differences report for each record one at a time.

Click on the required option. If field mappings are being tested, it is recommended that the
Process each Record and Show Differences one by one option is selected. AVEVA
Electrical will then process the data and show any differences in the Import Differences
window

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:62 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

The Import Differences window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported Excel) data. If the one by one option was selected, the difference for a
single record are listed. If the batch option was selected, differences for all records are
displayed.
To accept the changes either, select individual field data by clicking the Accept checkbox
for each.
Or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window (all individual records will be
auto-selected).
To save the checked (accepted) data to the catalogue click Save.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.
To cancel any import for the current tag record, click Close.
If the one by one import option was selected, the window then displays the differences for
the next record, if there is one.

Note: To cancel all further importing click Stop Import.

Once the import is complete, the Import Log window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:63 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

The Import Log window shows the user the import status and displays the successfully
imported files in the grid view.

5.18 Cable Drums


Wiring Manager supports cable drumming (the assignment of cables to cable drums).
A list of cables drums, the Cable Drum Schedule is available. From this, list drums can be
created and edited (see Create Cable Drums Manually), and as part of this process, cables
assigned to drums.
Wiring Manager also includes an auto-drumming facility (see Auto-Cable Drumming). Using
this facility, cables can be automatically assigned to drums using an algorithm to minimise
any unused cable based on each cable's length and the catalogue drum length. New drums
may be created as part of this process if they are required.
Individual cables may also be assigned to existing drums from the Cable Schedule. See
Assign Cables to Drums from the Cable Schedule.

5.18.1 Cable Drum Schedule


To view the project's Cable Drums, click Select in the Grids and Schedules section of the
Home tab.
Select Cable Drum Schedule from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Cable Drum
Schedule grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:64 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Cable drums can be created automatically, using the Auto-Cable Drumming facility, or
manually (refer to Create Cable Drums Manually).
When Wiring Manager auto-cable drums cables, it assigns unique names to the generated
drums. These can be changed in the grid.

Cable Drum Schedule - List Tools Options


The following options are located on the List Tools - Cable Drum Schedule tab:

Actions Section

Bulk Drum Lock Used to lock multiple drums selected in the grid. Refer to Bulk Lock
and Unlock Drums for details.

Bulk Drum Used to unlock multiple drums selected in the grid. Refer to Bulk
Unlock Lock and Unlock Drums for details.

5.18.2 Create Cable Drums Manually


To create a drum manually, open the Cable Drum Schedule grid and click New from the
Records section of the Home tab.
The Cable Drum Detail window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:65 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Enter a drum number, description etc.


Select a catalogue cable by clicking the button in the Catalogue No field. The Select a
Cable from Catalogue window is then displayed. Refer to Select Catalogue Cable for
details. The drum length and other details are derived from the selected catalogue cable.
Cables cannot be assigned to the drum yet. It must first be saved. Click Apply (or click OK
to save and exit the window, if cable assignment is to take place later).
Once a drum has been saved, the View Cables button becomes available:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:66 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

To assign cables to the drum, or to change the assignment of cables to drum, click View
Cables.
The Cables on Cable Drum window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:67 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Assign Cables to a Drum


To add a cable to the drum, click Add.
In the Select a Cable to add to Cable Drum window that is then displayed, double-click on
the cables to be added to the drum:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:68 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Once all the required drums have been added, click Exit to close the window. The selected
cables are listed in the Cables on Cable Drum window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:69 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Remove or Reassign Cables from a Drum


To remove a cable from the drum, select in it the Cables on Cable Drum window and press
the Delete key.
Users can manually reassign a cable to another drum (if one exists) by double-clicking on
the Cable No. This opens the Select Cable Drum window, which lists cable drums with the
same cable catalogue number.

Click on the required cable drum and click Select. Click Exit to close the window.

Lock or Unlock a Drum


When a drum is locked, it cannot be edited (except to unlock it). In addition, all the cables
assigned to drum cannot be edited either.
Drums can be locked and unlocked in bulk. Refer to Bulk Lock and Unlock Drums for
details.
To lock an individual drum, access the Cable Drum Detail window and check the Drum
Locked checkbox. Then click OK or Apply. The drum is then locked. All fields, controls etc.
in the Cable Drum Detail window (and in the grid) are disabled.
To unlock an individual drum, access the Cable Drum Detail window and check the Drum
Locked checkbox. Then click OK or Apply. The drum is then unlocked.

5.18.3 Auto-Cable Drumming


Wiring Manager supports auto-cable drumming: the assignment of cables to cable drums
using an algorithm to minimise any unused cable based on each cable's length and the
catalogue drum length.

Note: Cables can also be added to drums when cables drums are being created or edited
(see Create Cable Drums Manually), or manually from the Cable Schedule (see

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:70 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Assign Cables to Drums from the Cable Schedule).

From the Cable Schedule grid, select the cables to be drummed.


Click Auto-Cable Drum selected Cables in the Actions section of the List Tools - Cable
Schedule tab.
Only cables with a status of New or Replace will be auto-drummed. Also, cables marked as
Vendor Supplied, or with a length of 0 will not be auto-drummed. A message is displayed to
remind users of this:

Click OK. The Auto-Cable Drumming Options window is then displayed:

The available options are:


• Allow cables already Drummed to be Reassigned: if this option is selected, Wiring
Manager may 'move' cables between drums to help minimise cable wastage.
• Allow Wiring Manager to create new Cable Drums (if needed): if this option is
selected, Wiring Manager may create enough new drums to assign all cables. If no
drums have been created then this option must be selected.
Select the required options and click Auto Drum.
Wiring Manager then analyses the selected cables and any existing drum assignments,
creates the minimum number of drums and then assigns each selected cable to a drum in

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:71 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

such a way as to minimise any unused cabling on each drum. New drums are added to the
Cable Drum Schedule.

Auto remove Cables from Cable Drums


The Auto Drumming facility can also be used to remove multiple cables from a drum. Select
cables to be removed in the Cable Schedule grid, and access the Auto-Cable Drumming
Options window as described above.
Click Remove All. A message is then displayed requesting confirmation. Click OK. The
selected cables are then removed from any drums they were assigned.

Note: Cables can also be removed from drums manually. See Cable Drum Schedule.

5.18.4 Assign Cables to Drums from the Cable Schedule


Users can manually assign individual cables to drums from the Cable Schedule.
Click the button that appears in the Drum No cell for a cable when the mouse is hovered
over that cell.
This opens the Select Cable Drum window, which lists cable drums with the same cable
catalogue number.

Click on the required cable drum and click Select. Click Exit to close the window.

5.18.5 Bulk Lock and Unlock Drums


When a drum is locked, it cannot be edited (except to unlock it). In addition, all the cables
assigned to drum cannot be edited either.
Drums can be locked and unlocked individually. Refer to Lock or Unlock a Drum for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:72 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

Drums can also be locked and unlocked in bulk, i.e. multiple drums can be locked or
unlocked at the same time.
To lock multiple drums, select the drums in question in the Cable Drum Schedule grid, then
click Bulk Drum Lock from the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Drum Schedule
tab.
To unlock multiple drums, select the drums in question in the Cable Drum Schedule grid,
then click Bulk Drum Unlock from the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Drum
Schedule tab.
The selected drums are then locked or unlocked as appropriate.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:73 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cables

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 5:74 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

6 Cable Sizing

Wiring Manager includes a facility for calculating the required sizes of cables, which may
differ from the default sizes derived from catalogue cables. The facility will calculate the core
size required based on the values entered by the user (length etc). See Calculate Single
Cable Size.
Cable sizing may also be specified manually, by exporting to an Excel spreadsheet. The
completed spreadsheet may then be imported into back Wiring Manager. See Cable Sizing
Export and Cable Sizing Import.
A report listing differences between current and sized cable sizing related values may be
viewed. See Cable Sizing Check Report.

Note: The equations chosen for cable sizing may be either a selected standard, or user-
generated equations stored in an external file (an Excel spreadsheet - see External
Cable Sizing). If a is standard used (AS, BS, IEC or NEC), it is set in the Options
window of Electrical Engineering.

Note: After a cable has been sized, the default Cable Schedule grid will indicate this with a
tick in the Sized field for the cable in question.
If a sized cable needs re-sizing as a result of changes made that may affect the size
of cable required, this is indicated with a tick in the Needs Re-Sizing field.

6.1 Calculate Single Cable Size


To calculate a cable size for a load, select the cable from the Cable Schedule list, then click
Cable Sizing in the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.
If the equipment voltage exceeds the cable size range, the following message is displayed.

In such cases, cable cannot be sized using this method.


Otherwise, the Cable Sizing window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: The first time that the Cable Sizing window is accessed the following disclaimer is
displayed:

The message can be viewed again from a link on the Cable Sizing window.
The layout of the window depends on the cable sizing standard selected in Engineering. For
example, if the BS standard is selected, the following is displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: For further details of the Cable Sizing window, refer to the AVEVA Electrical
Common Functionality User Guide.

Note: If user-defined cable sizing equations from a spreadsheet are to be used, check the
External Cable Sizing checkbox. Refer to External Cable Sizing for details.

Note: If the cable is frozen or on a locked drum, it cannot be edited. The OK and Apply
buttons in the Cable Sizing window will be disabled.

Whichever standard is in use, select the appropriate details on the Cable Sizing tab and
complete the Cable Length field.

Note: If no length is entered, cable sizing may still take place using a default length if Zero
Length Cable Sizing is enabled in Engineering.

From the External Situation list, select either Free Air or Buried Underground. The middle
section of the tab then changes to display the fields relevant to the selected situation. For
example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

or:

The Fault Protection tab includes two further tabs, Short Circuit and Earth Current:

On the Short Circuit tab, complete the details as required, and click the Calculate Short
Circuit button to calculate the minimum required core size.
On the Earth Current tab, enter the voltage factor at device value, and click Calculate
Earth Fault Current to calculate the Earth Loop Impedance and Earth Fault Current values.

Calculate Cable Size


To calculate the cable size, click the Size Cable button. The Sizing Result tab is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

The Running Condition, Starting Condition, and Fault Protection fields are completed
automatically when the Size Cable button is pressed.
Clicking on the up arrow button on the Sizing Result tab (see below) will select a higher
cable size from the cable catalogue. The application will then re-calculate the core size,
current, voltage drop, and short circuit and earth fault calculations.

Specify De-Rating Factor


After the Size Cable button is clicked, the De-rating Factor section on the Cable Sizing tab
displays calculated de-rating factor values, based on the cable installation configuration.

The user can select a de-rating factor which will be used instead of the calculated value.
To select a de-rating factor, click the De-rating Factors button. The Derating Factors
window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Select the required factor from the list. The list includes the de-rating factors that are part of
the standard, and user-defined project specific de-rating factors set up in Engineering.
If a value is set at 1 then the rating will have no effect on the calculation.
Click Save. The selected factor is then displayed in the Chosen De-rating Factor field.
The Chosen De-rating Factor field value can only be set by the user to be equal to or less
than the Calculated De-rating Factor field value.
If this field is blank when the Size Cable button is clicked, it will be automatically populated
with the calculated value.

Complete Sizing Fields


Finally, click the Update button to complete the Project Cable Data fields: Cable Number
(an automatically generated number), Cable Type and Core Size.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: In order for cable data to be selected from the cable catalogue, the following values
in the window must match those of a cable or cables in the catalogue:

Field name in Cable Sizing window Cable Catalogue field name


Core Grouping CoreGrouping
Single / Multi SingleOrMulti
Material Material
Insulation Type InsulationType
Core Size CoreSize
Units displayed next to Core Size field CoreSizeUnits
Screened Screened
Armoured Armoured
Earth Core EarthCore
Rated Voltage * VoltageDesc *

* If the Rated Voltage / VoltageDesc field has a value then it is used to find a valid value
in the Cable Catalogue grid. If the field has no value then does not search for a valid
value in the Cable Catalogue grid.
Click Save to save these details and exit the window.

Note: For details of the cable sizing calculations, refer to the AVEVA Electrical Common
Functionality User Guide.

6.2 Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes


To calculate the cable size for a multiple cables, select the cables from the Cable Schedule
list, then click Cable Sizing in the Calculations section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule
tab.
If cables that cannot be sized have been selected, such as cables that are frozen or on a
locked drum and therefore cannot be edited, the following message is displayed:

Click Yes to cancel the operation or No to continue with it.


The Multiple Cable Sizing window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

The window will initially list the loads that cannot have their cables sized, i.e. those not
defined as a load/power cable:

Frozen cables and cables on locked drums will not be listed.


Click Next >.

Note: If user-defined cable sizing equations from a spreadsheet are to be used, check the
External Cable Sizing checkbox. Refer to External Cable Sizing for details.

The window will then list the loads that can have their cables sized.
For those loads for which cable sizing has already taken place, their cable numbers and
lengths are displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Select the loads that are to have their cables sized by checking the appropriate Accept
checkboxes. Check the Select All checkbox to check all the Accept checkboxes.
Click Next >.
The selected cables are then sized using automatically assigned parameters (length etc).
The window will display the results of the procedure:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click Close to exit the window.

6.3 External Cable Sizing


Cables can be sized using user-defined equations stored in an external Excel template,
instead of those from the selected standard.
A template must then be added to the External Cable Sizing Catalogue in Electrical
Engineer, from where Electrical database fields are mapped to the appropriate cells.
Once this is done, the template can be allocated to the loads, supplies and incomers
associated with the cables that are to be sized using its equations, also in Electrical
Engineer. Cable sizing can then take place for the cables. This can be carried out either in
Electrical Engineer, or in Wiring Manager, as explained below.
To size cables using an external template, initiate cable sizing in the normal way for either a
single or multiple cables, i.e. select the associated cable or cables and click Size Selected
Cable in the Calculations section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab.

Note: Ensure that the equipment associated with the cable(s) in question have been
allocated an external cable sizing template before doing so. If this has not been
done, an error message is described when cable sizing is attempted.

If a single cable was selected the Cable Sizing window is displayed. If multiple cables were
selected the Multiple Cable Sizing window is displayed. Refer to Calculate Single Cable
Size and Calculate Multiple Cable Sizes for details of these windows.
At the bottom of both windows is an External Cable Sizing checkbox. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Check this checkbox.

Note: If a cable is frozen or on a locked drum, it cannot be edited: the OK and Apply
buttons in the Cable Sizing window will be disabled, and it will not be listed in the
Multiple Cable Sizing window.

Continue at:
• Single Cable Procedure
• Multiple Loads Procedure

6.3.1 Single Cable Procedure


If sizing a single cable, the following message is displayed:

Click Yes to continue with external cable sizing.


The first tab on the window, <selected project standard> Cable Sizing is replaced by an
EXT. Cable Sizing tab.
The following message is then displayed:

Click Yes if the tab is to be completed with the default values entered in the Cable Sizing
Configuration window in Electrical Engineer.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click No if the fields on the tab are to be blank.


Select the appropriate details on the EXT. Cable Sizing tab and complete the Cable
Length field.
Proceed as described in Calculate Single Cable Size to complete the rest of the fields, tabs,
etc. with the required details, and click Size Cable.
The import of cable sizing data from the template is then initiated, and the Compare/Update
window is then displayed:

The window shows the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and proposed (imported
Excel template) data for the load.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

To accept the changes either, select individual field data by clicking Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window.
To save the checked (accepted) data, click Save (alternatively cancel the sizing procedure
by clicking Stop Cable Sizing).
The cable sizing values from the template are then imported and the Cable Sizing Result
window is displayed:

When the cable sizing procedure takes place, the results of the procedure are saved to a
temporary results file. This is a copy of the template file completed with the results of the
procedure. Click Yes to view it in Excel. Click No if this is not required.
Check the Don’t show again checkbox before clicking the required button if there is no
need for this window to be displayed again.
The Sizing Result tab is completed with the results of the procedure. Use the Update
button to select the cable catalogue number etc, as described in Calculate Single Cable
Size.

6.3.2 Multiple Loads Procedure


When sizing multiple cables, once the cables the procedure is to be run for have been
selected and the Next > button is clicked, the following is displayed:

To review and then accept or reject the differences between AVEVA Electrical data and
proposed (imported Excel template) data for each load individually, click Process each
Record and Show Differences one by one.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

The Compare/Update window is then displayed with the differences for the first load to be
processed displayed:

To accept the changes either select individual field data by clicking Accept checkbox for
each, or select the Accept All checkbox at the top of this window.
To save the checked (accepted) data, click Save (alternatively cancel the sizing procedure
by clicking Stop Cable Sizing).
The differences for the next load are then displayed.
To view the differences for all the loads at once, click Batch Process all Records and
Show Differences at end.
The Compare/Update window is then displayed with the differences for all the selected
loads displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Review and accept/reject the differences as described above.


The selected cables are then sized and the window will display the results of the procedure:

6.4 Cable Sizing Export


Cable data may be exported to an Excel spreadsheet into which cable sizing data may be
entered. The spreadsheet may then be imported with the sizing data back into Wiring
Manager (see Cable Sizing Import).
To export cable data to an Excel spreadsheet, with the Cable Schedule list open, click
Export Cables for Cable Sizing in the Export section of the Manage tab.
A Windows Save file as window is then displayed. Select the required location, enter a
filename and click Save to complete the export.
Data for all cables in the cable schedule is exported.

6.5 Cable Sizing Import


To import cable sizing data from an Excel spreadsheet, with the Cable Schedule list open,
click Import from Cable Sizing in the Import section of the Manage tab.
The Cable Sizing Import wizard window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Click Browse to locate the file from which data is to be imported, then click Next.
The wizard will show the following:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings drop down
or use the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these
mappings (if required).
Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The Mapping
Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced by a Save
button.

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save and the
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings drop down.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Select Cables and Import


On completion of mapping, click Next.
If there any cable numbers in the file that are no present in the database, the following is
then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

The cable numbers not in the database are listed. They will not be imported.
Click Next. The following is then displayed:

Check the checkboxes for the cables to be imported. Click the Select all checkbox to check
all the checkboxes.
Click Next. The following is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

The wizard lists those cable in the file for which data can be imported.
Click Import to carry out the import. The cable sizing data is then imported. The wizard
displays details of the results of the import procedure:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

In order to be imported, the details of a cable in the spreadsheet must match a catalogue
cable. If the details of a cable in the spreadsheet match those of a different catalogue cable
to that in the database, the catalogue cable of the cable in the database will be automatically
changed to the one in the spreadsheet.
Click Close to exit the wizard.

6.6 Cable Sizing Check Report


The Cable Sizing Check Report lists differences between current and sized cable sizing
related values.
Select the cables to run the report for from the Cable Schedule list, then click Cable Sizing
Check in the Tools section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab. The Cable Sizing
Check Report window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Sizing

For each cable selected differences between current and sized values are displayed. There
will be a row for each field where there is a difference.
Where there are differences, ‘Difference’ is displayed in the Result column. If there are no
differences, ‘No Difference’ is displayed in the Result column and the field and value fields
will be blank.
If no cable data has been calculated for a load, ‘No Cable’ data is displayed in the Result
column and the Cable No field will be blank.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 6:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

7 Terminations

Wiring Manager's Terminations window is used to create terminations and edit existing
terminations (connect/disconnect). The user can also edit terminal arrangements, terminal
markings, define terminal types, add wires, automatically add cross-patch wires, add links
and wires between terminals.
Terminations may also be imported from Excel. Various reporting facilities for terminations
are available.
Continue at:
• Access the Terminations Window
• Terminations User Interface
• Create and Edit Terminations using the Terminations Window
• Import Terminations from Excel
• Termination Reports

7.1 Access the Terminations Window


Users can access the Terminations window from many places in Wiring Manager.
• In the Equipment View, double-click on any equipment node (with terminals strips, DIN
Rails, terminals, devices etc). This displays the Terminations window showing all
terminal strips, DIN Rails, terminals, devices etc.
• In the Equipment View, double-click on any Terminal Strip or DIN Rail node. This
displays the Terminations window showing just the selected Terminal Strip or Din Rails
terminal arrangement.
• In the Cable Schedule list, click on the button that is displayed when the mouse is
hovered over the From or To cells and select the Edit Terminations from the
displayed Options window. This displays the Terminations window showing all
terminal strips, DIN Rails, terminals, devices etc.
• In the Cable Block Diagrams application, right-click on any equipment node and select
Edit Terminations from the pop-up menu.
• From the Major Equipment Catalogue, by selecting an item from the Major Equipment
Catalogue grid view, clicking Edit and selecting Edit Terminations from the displayed
Options window.
• From the Equipment Layout window, by right-clicking on a component and selecting
Edit Terminations from the menu that is then displayed, or clicking the Edit
Terminations button to edit the terminations of the equipment.
The Terminations window is then displayed. Refer to Terminations User Interface for
further details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

7.2 Terminations User Interface


The Terminations window may be accessed in several ways. Refer to Access the
Terminations Window.
The Terminations window is used create terminations and edit existing terminations. Users
can also edit terminal arrangements, terminal markings, define terminal types, add wires,
automatically add cross-patch wires, add links and looping wires between terminals.

For details of the Terminations window user interface continue at:


• Main Graphics Area
• Cables to Terminate
• Cores to Terminate
• Tab Commands
• Terminals Pop-up Menu
• Wire Pop-up Menu
• Devices and Wires
For how to use the Terminations window, refer to Create and Edit Terminations using the
Terminations Window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

7.2.1 Main Graphics Area


In the centre of the Terminations window the terminal strip is displayed, with lines
representing wires or cores on each side. Cable cores are displayed in black, wires are
displayed in blue.
Terminal markings/numbers are normally coloured black, unless they have a signal/wire
number assigned. If a terminal has a signal number it will be coloured blue.

Note: In Wiring Manager, all signal or wire numbers must belong to an equipment terminal.
Typically all field devices will have a signal or wire number added to each terminal. In
fact, signal numbers are added automatically to all field devices created with Wiring
Manager Wiring Rules.

On each wire’s outside edge the Cable Number of the core (if it is a cable core) or the wire
destination (if it is a wire) is displayed. In the centre of each wire there is more text
displaying two values. The left value is the core marking (if it is a cable core) and the right
value is the wire ferrule number or wire number. For wires there is a single value: the wire
number.
For more information on how devices and wires are depicted in the window, refer to Devices
and Wires.

7.2.2 Cables to Terminate


This section of the Terminations window lists all project cables that are connected at the
current Equipment and that also have cores that are not terminated at this end.

Note: Cable numbers only appear in this list if the 'From' or 'To' ends in the Cable Schedule
are the current equipment number, or the current equipment is a child node of either
the 'From' or 'To' end equipment. Refer to Create Terminations across Equipment
Cabinets for more information.

7.2.3 Cores to Terminate


This section of the Terminations window lists all those cores of the currently selected cable
(from the Cables to Terminate list) that are not yet terminated. As cores are terminated, they
are removed form this list. If a core is disconnected it is added to this list ready for
termination once again. To see cores from a specific cable, click on the cable number in the
Cable to Terminate list.

Note: To add new devices and/or terminals to the current equipment use the Wiring
Manager's Equipment View window.

7.2.4 Tab Commands


The following options are available on the Wiring, Links and Tools tabs at the top of the
Terminations window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Wiring Tab
Cables/ Add New Cable Used to create a new cable from the current
Wiring equipment. Displays the Cable Detail window
(see Create a New Project Cable). Once
saved, the new cable is added to the Cable to
Terminate list.

Cross-Patch Creates wires between terminals that have


same signal/wire numbers. Refer to Auto Cross
Patch Wiring.

Add Wiring Wizard Used to create multiple wires between


terminals using the Wiring Wizard. Refer to
Create Multiple Wires between Terminals.

Add Wire between Adds a single wire between any two selected
Selected Terminals terminals. To use this command, first select the
'From' and 'To' terminals.

Delete All Wires Deletes all wires in the current Terminations


window. This does not delete cable cores, only
internal (blue) wiring.

Show Ferrule Changes the Terminations windows display to


Numbers show each core/wire's Ferrule Number (hiding
the signal numbers). Users may toggle the
ferrule number/signal numbers on/off at any
time. Refer to Wire Numbering for more
information about signal numbers and ferrule
numbers in Wiring Manager.

Looping Add Left Looping Adds looping wires to the left side of selected
Wires Wires (Normal) terminals. Refer to Create Links and Looping
Wires.

Add Left Looping Adds long looping wires to the left side of
Wires (Long) selected terminals. Refer to Create Links and
Looping Wires.

Delete Selected Deletes a single looping wire that starts on the


Looping Wire selected terminal.

Add Right Looping Adds looping wires to the right side of selected
Wires (Normal) terminals. Refer to Create Links and Looping
Wires.

Add Right Looping Adds long looping wires to the right side of
Wires (Long) selected terminals. Refer to Create Links and
Looping Wires.

Delete All Looping Deletes all looping wires in the current window.
Wires

Links Tab

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Add Link (Normal)


Adds links (bridges) between selected
Add Link (Left) terminals. Refer to Create Links and Looping
Wires.
Add Link (Right)

Delete Selected Deletes a single link that starts on the selected


Link Terminal.

Delete All Links Deletes all Links in the current window.

Tools Tab
Undo Undoes the last command.

Find Equipment Displays the Find Component Tag window,


used to search for a component tag number.
within the window.

Find Signal No Displays the Find Signal No. window, used to


search for a signal number within the window.

Refresh Reloads the current data from the database,


saving the current terminations (and clearing
the undo list - the user will not be able to undo
any changes after refresh).

7.2.5 Terminals Pop-up Menu


Right-click on a terminal strip terminal to display the Terminals pop-up menu:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Terminal Pop-up Menu Commands

Change Terminal Displays the Change Terminal Marking window (see Change
Marking Terminal Markings), used to change the terminal marking (and to
edit wire numbers attached to the terminal, if any).

Swap Left & Right Swaps all wires on left with wires on right for selected terminals.
Connections

Disconnect Disconnects all wires on selected terminals (either on the left side
only, tight side only or both sides depending on the sub-menu
option selected). See Disconnect Wires/Cores.

Set Terminal Type Sets the terminal type to either 'Standard' (default), 'Disconnect'
or 'Fused' depending on sub-menu option selected.

Note: The terminal graphic representation changes to show the selected terminal type.
This same graphic is used when Wiring Manager creates termination reports and
when Designer generates a CAD drawing.

Set Terminal Used to set the left, right or both sides of the selected terminal as
Reservation “reserved”, depending on the sub-menu option selected. A sub-
menu option is also available to undo the reservation. See Set
Terminals as Reserved or Spare.

Set Spare Used to set the left, right or both sides of the selected terminal as
Terminals “spare”, depending on the sub-menu option selected. A sub-menu
option is also available to undo this setting. See Set Terminals as
Reserved or Spare.

Split Terminal Splits selected terminals out of current strip into a new one. This
Strip retains all connections on both sides.

Delete Terminals Enables selected terminals to be deleted, disconnecting any


terminations as well.

Select All Selects all terminals in the terminal's terminal strip.

Select By Used to select every second, third or fourth terminal, depending


on the sub-menu option selected.

DeSelect All De-selects all terminals in terminal's terminal strip.

If a user right-clicks on a Field Device terminal the Field Device Terminations pop-up menu
is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Change Terminal Displays the Change Terminal Marking window (see Change
Marking Terminal Markings), used to change the terminal marking (and to
edit wire numbers attached to the terminal, if any).

Disconnect from Disconnects wires from the selected terminal.


Selected

Disconnect All Disconnects wires from all selected terminals.


Selected

Select All Selects all the device’s terminals.


Terminals

Select By Used to select every second, third or fourth terminal, depending on


the sub-menu option selected.

DeSelect All De-selects all terminals in the terminal's terminal strip.


Terminals

Other Terminal Menu Options


The right-click menu for Devices and I/O Modules includes the following additional option:

Edit Signal No. Opens the Change Terminal Marking window, in which the signal
number may be edited. Refer to Change Terminal Markings.

The right-click menu for Earth Bars and Terminal Strips includes the following additional
option:

Split Earth Bar/ Used to split the currently selected terminals off the Earth Bar or
Split Terminal Terminal Strip to create a new Earth Bar or Terminal Strip.
Strip

7.2.6 Wire Pop-up Menu


If a users right-clicks on a wire (at the wire number annotation) the Wire pop-up menu is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Wire Pop-up Menu Commands

Show Other End Displays the a new Terminations window for the equipment
Terminations at the other end of the selected wire.

Show Other End Details Displays the Wire Interconnection Details window. Refer
to Trace Wire Interconnections.

Edit Ferrule Marking Displays the Edit Ferrule marking window. Refer to
Manual Ferrule Numbering.

Disconnect Wire Disconnects the selected wire.

Disconnect Cable Disconnects the selected cable.

7.2.7 Devices and Wires


This topic describes how devices and wires are depicted in the Terminations window.
For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

This example shows two I.S. Barriers created on a DIN Rail with a terminal strip. Refer to
Add Devices (Relays, Barriers etc) for details.
Users cannot change any equipment layout in the Terminations window. To change the
sequence of devices/terminal strips or add/delete devices, use the Equipment Layout View
window.

Core/Wire Colours
Black wires are cores from a cable.
Blue wires are wires not from a cable.

Note: Wires are normally used for internal wiring only. That is, both ends are terminated in
the same equipment or cabinet.

Note: Cables, wires, links and loop wires owned by Instrumentation are red. Refer to
Cables and Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation for more information.

Core/Wire Information
At the end of each cable core is the cable number.
At the end of each wire is the destination termination (Device tag + ':' + terminal number).
If there are wires in the current equipment that have not been terminated, the word 'Wires'
will be displayed in the 'Cable to Terminate' list. Click on 'Wires' in this list to view all
disconnected wires in the 'Cores' to Terminate' list.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

7.3 Create and Edit Terminations using the Terminations


Window
For details of how to create and edit terminations using the Terminations window, and
related procedures, continue at:
• Select Terminals
• Set Terminals as Reserved or Spare
• Terminate Wires/Cores
• Cable Termination Options
• Disconnect Wires/Cores
• Add a New Project Cable
• Create Multiple Wires between Terminals
• Create Links and Looping Wires
• Auto Cross Patch Wiring
• Wire Numbering
• Trace Wire Interconnections
• Create Terminations across Equipment Cabinets
• Change Terminal Markings
• Cables and Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation
See also Import Terminations from Excel.

7.3.1 Select Terminals


To select a terminal click on the desired terminal. The terminal background changes to red.
Re-selecting a selected terminal de-selects the terminal. Multiple terminals may be selected
at the same time.

Select a range of terminals by pressing the Shift key and clicking the 'start' terminal, then
pressing the Shift key and clicking the 'end' terminal. All those terminals between the first
clicked and second clicked terminal will be selected (this is much like Windows range
selection methods).
The Terminals Pop-up Menu includes Select All and Select By options.

7.3.2 Set Terminals as Reserved or Spare


Terminals can be set as reserved or as spare.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

When wire terminations are made by dragging a cable from the Cables to Terminate list
onto the terminal strip (see Terminate Wires/Cores), reserved and spare terminals are
automatically skipped and are not terminated. Terminations are instead made to the next
available terminals in the strip.
Terminations can still be made by dragging a core from the Cores to Terminate list onto a
reserved or spare terminal (this automatically removes their reserved or spare status), and
by using the Wiring Wizard (see Create Multiple Wires between Terminals). In the case of
reserved terminals, a warning message is displayed. This user must click Yes to complete
the termination.
Links and looping wires (see Create Links and Looping Wires) can be made to and from
spare terminals, but not reserved terminals.
To set a terminals as reserved or spare, select it (see Select Terminals), then right-click on it
to display the Terminals Pop-up Menu.
From the menu click either Set Terminal Reservation or Set Spare Terminals as required.
From the sub-menu that is then displayed, click Left Side, Right Side or Both Sides as
required.
Reserved terminal sides are coloured grey, spare terminal sides are coloured blue.

Reserved terminals can be changed to spare terminals and the other way around using the
above procedure.
To remove the reserved or spare setting from a terminal, select it, then right-click on it to
display the Terminals Pop-up Menu. From the menu, select either Set Terminal
Reservation or Set Spare Terminals as required, then click Clear from the sub-menu.
If clearing the reserved status from a terminal or changing it to spare, a warning message is
displayed. This user must click Yes to complete the procedure.

7.3.3 Terminate Wires/Cores


There are two main ways to make wire terminations:
• Drag and drop cores/wires: click on a wire or core in the Cores to Terminate list,
drag it next to a terminal and drop it (i.e. release the mouse button).
• Drag and drop cables: click on a cable number in the Cables to Terminate list, drag
it to a terminal strip and drop it (i.e. release the mouse button). When terminating a
cable Wiring Manager will display the Connect Options window (see Cable
Termination Options).
Users may also drag and drop core/wires between terminals. Click on a wire or core, drag it
next to a terminal and drop it (release the mouse button).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Wiring Manager supports up to two terminations per side per terminal. If two terminations
exist, both connections, wire/ferrule numbers and cable number (if any) are displayed next
to the terminal. Wiring Manager will not allow a third termination to be added to the same
terminal side.
When wire terminations are made by dragging a cable from the Cables to Terminate list
onto the terminal strip, reserved and spare terminals (see Set Terminals as Reserved or
Spare) are automatically skipped and are not terminated. Terminations are instead made to
the next available terminals in the strip.
When wire terminations are made by dragging a core from the Cores to Terminate list onto
a reserved or spare terminal (this automatically removes their reserved or spare status). In
the case of reserved terminals, a warning message is displayed. This user must click Yes to
complete the termination.

Note: Wiring Manager also supports the creation and termination of multiple wires between
selected terminals and auto cross-patch wire creation and termination. See Create
Multiple Wires between Terminals and Auto Cross Patch Wiring.

7.3.4 Cable Termination Options


When terminating a cable from the Terminations window a user will be prompted to select
a termination options from the Connect Options window:

The options are:

Match Signal Nos


Attempts to match the signal number on opposite side of terminal strip with any signal
numbers found in the cable's 'Cores to Terminate' list. If a match is found, that core/wire will
be terminated at the terminal with the matching signal number.

Don't Match Signal Nos


Wiring Manager looks for first spare terminal and connects the first core in core list to the
first spare terminal found. It then looks for the next spare terminal and terminates the next
core etc.
Two sub-options may be applicable:
• Terminate Shields/Screens/Earth - When checked, screens/shields/earth will be
terminated. When unchecked, they will be left disconnected.
• Skip Shield/Screen/Earth Terminals - If the Terminate Shields/Screens/Earth
option is unchecked, users are given the option to skip a terminal where a shield/
screen would have been terminated, or where the other side of a terminal has a screen/
shield terminated.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Note: In all cases, signal/wire numbers will be updated using Wiring Manager's Signal
Number Inheritance feature. If users chose not to match signal numbers, and signal
numbers on a spare terminal do not match, users are warned of this, but the
termination still takes place

7.3.5 Disconnect Wires/Cores


To disconnect a core/wire drag it to the Cores to be Terminated list and drop it there.
To disconnect multiple cores/wires, select multiple terminals, then right-click on any
selected terminal. From the menu that is then displayed (see below) select the appropriate
Disconnect option.

7.3.6 Add a New Project Cable


Users can add new project cables directly from any equipment in the Terminations window
by selecting Add New Cable from the Wiring tab. The Cable Details window is then
displayed. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for details.

Note: When the new cable is created the cable number, it is added to the Cables to
Terminate list. However, sometimes users may need to click the Refresh toolbar
button for the cable number to appear.

7.3.7 Create Multiple Wires between Terminals


Users may need to create wires between component terminals (e.g. from an Terminal Strip
to an IS Barrier, or from a I/O module to a Power Supply etc). Wiring Manager contains a
'Wiring Wizard' feature to facilitate this.

Create Multiple Wires between Terminals


From the Terminations window, from the Wiring tab, select Add Wiring Wizard. The
Wiring Wizard window (Add multiple Wires between selected Terminals) is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

To add terminals to “from” terminals, select the terminals that to create the wires from (this
can be on any number of components) from the Terminations window (the wizard window
“floats” over the Terminations window, so that selections can still be made from that
window even when the wizard window is open).

Note: Wires will be created in the order the terminals are selected. Any wire/signal
numbers will be inherited from the “from” terminals prior to the “to” terminals
(selected later).

The following figure shows four terminals selected on a Terminal Strip:

As each terminal is selected it is added to the wizard window, as shown below:

Note: De-selecting a terminal from the Terminations window will remove the terminal from
the wizard window.

Note: To specify the wire side (left or right) on a Terminal Strip or Earth Bar, select the
terminal by clicking nearest to either the left or right side.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Once selected all the required “from” terminals have been selected, click Next. The wizard
the shows the “To” terminals list:

Select the “to” terminals from the Terminations window in the same way as the “from”
terminals. In this example four terminals have been selected on a barrier:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Once the required “to” terminals have been selected, click Next. The wizard will then show
all the selected terminals:

Note: The wizard will create wires between aligned Terminals: there must therefore always
be a matching number of terminals in each list. Terminals in either list can be
removed by selecting then pressing the <Delete> key on the keyboard. Terminals
can be re-ordered by dragging and dropping them within a list.

To create wires between the terminals, click Create.


Wiring Manager will then create all the wires between the listed terminals.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Note: If any reserved terminals were selected (see Set Terminals as Reserved or Spare), a
warning message is displayed. This user must click Yes to complete the procedure

7.3.8 Create Links and Looping Wires


Wiring Manager supports terminal 'Links' (or bridging) and terminal looping wires. For
example:

Links are hard bridges between terminals (as shown within the terminal strip above) and can
only be added to Terminal Strips.
A looping wire is an external wire looping between terminals. Looping wires can be either on
the left or right side of any component in Wiring Manager.

Note: If any reserved terminals (see Set Terminals as Reserved or Spare) cannot be
connected by looping wires (spare terminals can). An error message is displayed if
this is attempted. Links to and from reserved terminals may be created however.

To Add a New Link or Looping Wire


Select all the terminals within the same Terminal Strip (or Device if adding looping wires)
that requires links or loop wires.
From the Terminations window, select the Links or Wiring tab, then select required option
to add the links or wires as described below.
To create links, click Add Link (Normal), Add Link (Left) or Add Link (Right) as
appropriate.
To create looping wires, click Add Left Looping Wires (Normal), Add Left Looping Wires
(Long), Add Right Looping Wires (Normal) or Add Right Looping Wires (Long) as
required.
The two 'long' options create looping wires that are longer than the standard type.

Removing/Deleting Links and Looping Wires


To delete a link or loop wire select the top-most terminal of the link or looping wire and
select the Delete Selected Link or Delete Selected Looping Wire option from the Links or
Wiring tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

To delete all links or loop wires from all the items in the terminations view, select the Delete
All Links or Delete All Looping Wires option from the Links or Wiring tab.

7.3.9 Auto Cross Patch Wiring


Wiring Manager supports the automatic creation and termination of wires between terminals
carrying the same signal (wire) number. This process is called Auto Cross Patching. Cross
patch wire creation only occurs for wires where there is no termination on the other side of
its terminal, that is where a terminal is not already connected on both sides if the terminal is
a through connector. In the case of devices or I/O modules, the terminal must not already
have any prior wires terminated to be considered a candidate for cross patch wiring.
Auto Cross Patching is an ideal way to create wires between two terminal strips or between
a terminal strip and I/O as Wiring Manager will create multiple wires in one go, by searching
through all terminals and creating all possible cross patch wires where matching signals
exist.
Auto Cross Patch wiring enables users to choose the target equipment (e.g. marshalling
cabinet, I/O cabinet etc) to cross patch to. Cross patching always occurs between the
current equipment in the Termination window and a user selected equipment tag. Users can
also choose to cross patch only within the current equipment tag.

Auto Cross Patching Procedure


From the Terminations window, select Cross Patch from the Wiring tab.
Wiring Manager will then display the Select Equipment window, listing of all equipment in
the current location:

Auto Cross Patch wiring will take place between the current equipment in the Terminations
window and the target equipment selected from the above window. The first item in this list
is always the equipment tag that is the current focus of the Terminations window.
To select the target equipment, double-click on it.
Wiring Manager will then process all possible wire terminations between every terminal in all
terminal strips, devices and I/O modules in each of the current and Target equipment.
Wiring Manager compares each terminals signal number to all others in the Target

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

equipment. If a match is found a new wire is created and terminated on both the matching
terminals. This process is repeated again until all possible wires are added.
To cancel cross patch wiring click the close button to close the window.

Wiring Manager Wiring Wizard (Manual Cross-Patch Wiring)


Sometimes users may wish to create wires between component terminals (e.g. from an
Terminal Strip to an IS Barrier, or from an I/O module to a Power Supply etc) that do not
lend themselves to cross-patching, especially if the terminals to be connected do not have
signal/wire numbers that match. Wiring Manager contains a 'Wire Wizard' feature to
facilitate this. Refer to Create Multiple Wires between Terminals for details.

7.3.10 Wire Numbering


Refer to Wire Numbering for information regarding wire numbering concepts in Wiring
Manager.

7.3.11 Trace Wire Interconnections


From the Terminations window, right-click on any terminated wire (at the wire number
annotation). Select the Show Other End Details option from the menu that is then
displayed. The Wire Interconnection Details window is then displayed:

Cable Data Section


Shows details of the cable (only if the selected wire is a cable core).

Destination Termination Data Section


Shows the equipment, terminal strip and terminal at the other end of the selected wire is (if
the wire is actually terminated at the other end).
To view further details of the other end of the selected wire, click View Terminations. A
new Terminations window is then displayed, showing the equipment terminations at the
other end of the wire.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

7.3.12 Create Terminations across Equipment Cabinets


Wiring Manager supports the splitting a cable's end cores across equipment (that is, some
cores of the same end in terminated in Equipment 1 and others in Equipment 2). Wiring
Manager also supports the termination of wires between equipment.
By default, cable terminations can only be made at the cable's 'From' and 'To' ends as
defined in the cable schedule. However, Wiring Manager enables cores from a single cable
end to be terminated across multiple equipment tags, not just the equipment defined in the
cable's 'From' and 'To' fields.
To terminate a cable across multiple equipment, open both equipment in the Wiring
Terminations window and drag cores/wires from one window to the other, terminating using
the drag and drop method described in the Terminations User Interface.
Wiring Manager also enables wires to be terminated between equipment in the same way.
Once a wire has been created it can be terminated across equipment by dragging an end
from one Terminations window to a second Terminations window.

7.3.13 Change Terminal Markings


Note: Terminal Markings cannot be edited for Devices and I/O Modules for a specific
project instance as all Devices and I/O Modules are a copy of the Catalogue
definition. The only way to change terminal markings (or arrangements) for
catalogue components is to select another catalogue item or edit the catalog item in
the Device or I/O Module Catalogues. Changing a Catalogue component changes all
instances of that component in the entire project. This forces all components used to
be identical to the Catalogue definition.

To change an individual terminal marking (terminal number) for a terminal on a Terminal


Strip, Earth Bar or Field Device, or to re-sequence selected terminals in a Terminal Strip or
Earth Bar, from the Terminations window, right-click on the Terminal to be changed.
From the menu that is then displayed, select the Change Terminal Marking or Change
Signal No. option. The Change Terminal marking window is displayed, showing the
current Terminal marking:

Changing Terminal Marking


To change a terminal marking enter a new value in the Terminal Marking field and click
Save.
If multiple terminals were selected in the Terminations window, then selecting the Apply
New Sequence to all following Terminals checkbox will re-number the selected terminals
sequentially from the entered for terminal marking. This feature only works if the new
terminal marking is numeric.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Changing Signal Numbers


In Wiring Manager, all signal (or wire) numbers start from an equipment terminal. Typically,
all field devices would have a signal number added to each terminal. In fact, signal numbers
are added automatically to all field devices created with Wiring Manager Wiring Rules (see
Using Wiring Rules).
If a terminal that already contains a signal number is right-clicked on, the Change Terminal
marking window is displayed:

To change a wire number/marking enter a new value in the Terminal Marking field and
click Save.
Users can set the default signal numbers for each Field Device terminal when defining
Wiring Rules. Refer to Wiring Rule Definitions.

Manually Adding Signal Numbers


If required, users can manually assign a signal number on any terminal by double-clicking
on the Signal Number field. This removes the 'read-only' property from the signal number.
The users may then enter a different number.

Note: Signal/wire numbers assigned to terminals remain on their terminal regardless of


which wires are terminated. Users should only assign signal/wire numbers to
terminals that carry a permanent signal e.g. a Field Device etc. However, there are
valid situations where users may need to permanently assign a signal to terminal in a
terminal strip, such as picking up a motor run contact from an interposing relay
cabinet or from an MCC. In this case there is no 'Field Device'.

Remember that signal numbers are inherited by all wires/cable cores that are connected
directly to a terminal containing a signal number, and wires connected to a wire that has an
inherited Signal Number. Refer to Wire Numbering for more details.

7.3.14 Cables and Equipment Shared with AVEVA Instrumentation


Cables, wires, links and loop wires created in AVEVA Electrical can be shared with AVEVA
Instrumentation, and vice versa. Shared items may only be edited using the “owning”
application, i.e. the application in which they were created.
The application which owns cable, wire, link or loop wire is indicated by its colour:
• Cables owned by Electrical are red.
• Cables owned by Instrumentation are black.
• Wires, links and loop wires owned by Electrical are red.
• Wires, links and loop wires owned by Instrumentation are blue.
Other points to note:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

• Cables owned by Electrical can be terminated on shared equipment.


• Only cables etc owned by Electrical can be dragged and dropped.

7.4 Import Terminations from Excel


Terminations can be established by importing their details from an Excel spreadsheet.
The Excel spreadsheet must be in a simple tabular format (columns and rows) and the first
row should contain unique column names (headings) so that AVEVA Electrical can identify
the column's data. The column names are user definable but must not be duplicated.
AVEVA Electrical will only import column data that contains a heading,
The Excel file must contain the following columns: Cable Number, Core Marking, Parent
Equipment Number, Equipment Number, Terminal Marking and Left or Right.
Once an Excel spreadsheet is selected for import, users must 'map' each Excel column
name (heading) to an AVEVA Electrical database field using the AVEVA Electrical import
utility. Data can then be imported into AVEVA Electrical. The import utility will check if the
identity column field exists in mappings.
While processing records to be imported, if a record already exists in the database AVEVA
Electrical will show the differences between the imported data and the AVEVA Electrical
data, allowing the user to accept/reject the proposed changes on a record by record (and
field by field) basis. If the record does not exist in AVEVA Electrical and the user accepts the
importation of the record, AVEVA Electrical will create a new record for that drawing or
catalogue item.
The Import Procedure
Open the Equipment View, Equipment List or Cable Schedule. Select Terminations from
the Import section of the Manage tab.
The Terminations Import Wizard window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Click Browse and select the Excel file from which data is to be imported. Click Next >.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Note: To minimise the possibility that data currently being worked on by another user may
be affected by an import, a list of the users working on the current project is available
from the UserCount link. The number of current users is displayed next to the link.
This total includes the user performing the import.

The next window shows all the columns in the Excel spreadsheet to be imported. Select an
existing Field Mapping (if one for this Import type exists) from saved mappings list, or use
the automatic mappings created by AVEVA Electrical and make changes to these mappings
(if required).
Excel Column Name fields display the names of the columns in the spreadsheet. The
AVEVA Electrical Field fields displays the Electrical fields they are mapped to.
To map an Excel Column to an AVEVA Electrical database field, click in the AVEVA
Electrical Field field adjacent to the relevant Excel Column Name field, and select the
required AVEVA Electrical field from a drop-down list. To exclude a field from the import,
click Clear button in the grid against the field that needs to be excluded or select the blank
entry from the mapping drop-down list.

Note: AVEVA Electrical automatically checks each Excel Column Name from the first row
in the Excel worksheet against fields names in AVEVA Electrical Database (if not
found then field Captions - as set in the Grid Manager). If a match is found then
AVEVA Electrical automatically adds the Field Name to the mapping list. The user
can select a different field from the mapping list if required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Defining a New Mapping Definition


Sets of column-field mappings can be saved and re-used for future imports. Define the
required mappings as described above, then select the New command button. The
Mapping Name and Description fields are then displayed and the New button is replaced
by a Save button.

Once the name and description for the mapping have been entered, click Save. The
mappings will be saved and added to the Saved Mappings list.

Note: Data can also be imported by just clicking on the Import button. However it may
save time to save the mappings if an import with those mappings is to be performed
again.

Importing the Data


Once the mappings have been set up, click Next >.
A list of terminations in the spreadsheet that will not be imported because they are invalid in
some way in then displayed, along with the reason that they are invalid:

Click Next >.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

A list of valid terminations is then displayed:

Click Import to proceed with the import. The import then takes place and the terminations
detailed in the spreadsheet are established. After the import is complete, a log of the
imported terminations is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Click Close the exit the import wizard.

7.5 Termination Reports


Wiring Manager enables uses to quickly and accurately produce reports for any equipment's
terminations that can be printed out or saved in PDF format for electronic transfer. These
reports are non-CAD so they do not require a CAD program to create.

Note: AVEVA Electrical also supports the creation of Termination Diagrams in AutoCAD
DWG format from the Designer module.

Wiring Manager creates a single termination report for the selected Equipment Number,
using multiple pages if necessary. New pages are created when the number of terminals
exceeds the maximum allowable for a specific page size/orientation. Wiring Manager
always creates a new page for each new DIN Rail. Terminal strips on a common DIN Rail
are kept together and a new page is not created unless all terminals will not fit on the current
page.
An Equipment Termination report can be run in several ways:
• In the Equipment View, right-click on the required equipment node and select Print
Preview Terminations from the pop-up menu.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

• In the Equipment List grid, select the required equipment and select Preview
Termination Report in the Printing section of the List Tools - Equipment List tab.
• In the Equipment List grid, click on the Equipment No cell button for the equipment,
then click View Terminations (Print Preview) on the Options window that is then
displayed.
• In the Equipment Layout window (refer to Equipment Layout), right-click on the
required equipment and select Print Preview Terminations from the pop-up menu.
• In the Cable Schedule grid, click the From or To cell button listing the equipment, then
click View Terminations (Print Preview) on the Options window that is then
displayed.
• In the Wiring Rules Editor window (refer to Adding a New Wiring Rule Definition),
right-click on the required equipment and select Termination Report from the pop-up
menu.
The AVEVA Electrical Termination Reports window is then displayed:

Various functions are available to the user via the File, Edit, View and Layout drop-down
menus, or by clicking the required button on the toolbar.

File Menu
Save Saves the report to the database. This option is available on
the toolbar.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Refresh Updates and reloads the Equipment data and refreshes the
window. This option is available on the toolbar.

Recreate Diagram Restores any equipment removed from the Termination


Report by the Remove from Diagram option. Recalculates
the location for all the equipment and finds any new
connected Equipment if it exists.

Export to PDF Exports the report to a .PDF format file in the project’s
Drawing folder. The filename used is either the Sketch
Number, as defined in the Equipment List, or if no sketch
number exists, the Equipment number.

Export to XPS Exports the report to an .XPS format file in the project’s
Drawing folder. The filename used is either the Sketch
Number, as defined in the Equipment List, or if no sketch
number exists, the Equipment number.

Export to AutoCAD Selecting this option exports the Termination Report to


AutoCAD.

Page Setup Displays the Page Setup window, which enables the user to
change the paper size and source, the orientation and the
size of the margins.

Print Preview Displays the Print preview window, which enables the user
to view the report before sending it to a printer. This option is
available on the toolbar.

Print Displays the Print window, which enables allows the user to
customise the print. This option is available on the toolbar.

Printing Enables the user to print the report to a defined size by


selecting a percentage. After a percentage is selected, the
Print preview window is displayed, which enables the user
to view the print before sending to a printer.

Preferences Displays a Preferences window.

Exit Closes the AVEVA Electrical Termination Reports window.

Edit Menu
Undo Undoes the last command. This option is available on the
toolbar.

Redo Redoes the last undo. This option is available on the toolbar.

Trim Canvas Enables the user to change the size of canvas to the actually
size of the diagram.

Select All Selects all objects.

Find Equipment Displays the Find Text window allowing the user to search
for a string of characters.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Insert Note Opens a text box into which a note can be entered. The text
box can be positioned in the report by clicking on it and
dragging it to the required position.

View Menu
Show Overview Display the Overview window, which displays all the report
pages.

Predefined percentage Enables the user to select a predefined zoom percentage.

Zoom Normal Sets the report back to the default zoom.

Zoom to Fit Zooms the report to fit all the pages into the window. This
option is available on the toolbar.

Zoom In Increases the image size of the report. This option is


available on the toolbar.

Zoom Out Decreases the image size of the report. This option is
available on the toolbar.

Layout Menu
Align Horizontally Moves two or more selected nodes to the same row, aligned
with the first selected node.

Align Vertically Moves two or more selected nodes to same column, aligned
with first selected node.

Layout (Flat) Used to layout a report automatically, by positioning the items


and routing the links horizontally.

7.5.1 Preferences
Termination Report preferences can be set from the Preferences window. To display the
Preferences window select File > Preferences.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

General Tab

The General tab is used to specify how reports are displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Cables/Wires Tab

The Cable/Wires tab allows the user to specify how the cable and wires will be displayed in
reports.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Printing Tab

The Printing tab is used to set the default paper size, orientation and margins, the
maximum number of terminals that can be displayed on each page and to add a header and
footer to the pages.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Export Tab

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

The Export tab is used to define the settings to be used when exporting the Termination
Report to AutoCAD.

Note: A user must have AutoCAD installed on their workstation to export a Termination
Report successfully.

The user can change the preferences back to the default settings by clicking Use Default.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Preferences window, or Cancel to close the
Preferences window without saving any changes.
If OK is clicked a warning message is displayed, informing the user that applying the new
settings will cause the diagram to reload.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Terminations

Click Yes to continue or No to terminate the process.

7.5.2 Title Blocks on Termination Reports


Wiring Manager supports title blocks and revisions on Termination Reports for equipment
that have Sketch Numbers. Wiring Manager will create the termination report with a title
block complete with Revision history.

If equipment does not have a Sketch Number, these blocks are not displayed. Sketch
(Document) numbers and Revisions are added/edited from the Equipment List window.
Users can add/edit Termination Report document revisions for multiple reports - refer to
Report Revision Entry.
This title block is 'fixed' and cannot be modified by the user.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 7:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

8 Wire Numbering

Wiring Manager supports two methods of wire numbering:


1. Signal Numbers - wire numbers are based on a 'source' signal.
2. Ferrule Numbers - wire numbers are different at each wire or end of each wire.
Both these methods can be used in a single Wiring Manager project. However when both
are used, Ferrule Numbers always override Signal Numbers when Wiring Manager creates
termination reports or Termination Diagram drawings (in AutoCAD using Designer). So any
Signal Number is always ignored in documents and reports if a Ferrule Number exists at a
specific wire end. This enables users to override Signals if required in documents.

Signal Numbers
A Signal Number originates at a terminal. All wires connected to that terminal or wires
connected to wires connected to that terminal inherit the same Signal Number.

In the above example, a Signal Number (red) has been attached to the field Device's first
terminal (+). Consequently as a wire (or cable core) is connected to that terminal, the Signal
Number is 'inherited' along all wires that are connected together in the circuit. Hence all the
wires marked with the blue arrows have their signal numbers generated from the single
Signal at field device terminal + (red arrow).
Furthermore, if the Signal at the originating terminal is changed (i.e. the Signal Number is
changed) then all Signal Numbers for all interconnected wires will also automatically change
to the new Signal Number.
This Signal Numbering system is the most commonly used in the industry and is the easiest
to apply with Wiring Manager. By default, Wiring Manager shows Signal Numbers in the
Terminations window (see Terminations User Interface) since its more likely users are
working with specific signals than Ferrule Numbers (see below).
Signal Numbers can be manually created and/or edited from the Terminations window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

Ferrule Numbers
Wiring Manager supports Ferrule Numbering. When Ferrule Numbering is used, each wire
end may have a different number, i.e each end (ferrule) of a wire is numbered instead of
there being a single number for the wire.
In Wiring Manager, a Ferrule Number is stored for each wire end. The default value is empty
(blank).

In the above example, all the Ferrule Numbers are independent and have been set to a
specific value required for the current project/plant standards.
When Ferrule Numbers are used, Wiring Manager continues to create and update Signal
Numbers as terminations are created and changed.
Ferrule Numbers always override Signal Numbers in document, as explained above.
Ferrule Numbers can be manually set or removed using the Terminations window (see
Manual Ferrule Numbering). Automatic Ferrule Rules can also be set up for the project so
they are automatically created as wire and cables are terminated (see Automatic Ferrule
Numbering.

8.1 Manual Ferrule Numbering


Note: Remember that any Ferrule Number applied to a wire end always takes preference
to any Signal Number on that wire. So termination reports and all Wiring Manager
drawings showing this wire will display the Ferrule Number instead of the Signal
Number.

If a manual ferrule number is required to be displayed in a report or drawing, from the


Terminations window (see Terminations User Interface), right-click on the wire end (or
cable core end) to be changed. From the pop-up menu then displayed, select the Edit
Ferrule Marking option.
The Edit Ferrule Marking window is then displayed, showing the current Ferrule Number
(marking):

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

Enter the required number in the Ferrule Number field.


The Apply to Both wire ends option is used to label both ends of a wire with the same
Ferrule Number in a single edit.

Note: The Ferrule Number at the other end of the wire is not actually updated in the
database until the user clicks Save in the Terminations window.

Click Save.

Note: Once a Ferrule Number has been added to the wire end it remains on that wire end
until it is edited again or it is overwritten by another Ferrule Number if Automatic
Ferrule Numbering Rules are applied. Currently, as a safeguard, Wiring Manager
also automatically sets Ferrule Numbers to nothing (blank) when wires containing
Ferrule Numbers are disconnected.

8.2 Automatic Ferrule Numbering


Some projects and/or plants may require a different wire Ferrule Number at every (or almost
every) wire end. Normally this could require many hundreds of design man-hours entering
these Ferrule Numbers. However, Wiring Manager includes a 'Ferrule Numbering Rule'
feature that enables users to define rules for automatic Ferrule numbering.

Note: For this feature to be used, the Use Auto Ferrule Numbering Rules option must be
checked in the Wiring Manager's Options window.

Ferrule Numbering Rules can derive data from the following:


From the current wire termination:
• Equipment No
• Terminal Strip No (or Device tag)
• Terminal Marking (Terminal No)
From the other end of the current wire termination:
• Equipment No
• Terminal Strip No (or Device tag)
• Terminal Marking (Terminal No)
If the wire is part of a cable (a cable core), from the:
• Cable Number
• Core Marking
• Core Group No (e.g. the Pair Number)

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

Ferrule Numbering Rules enable any of these values to be applied to create a Ferrule
Number. For example, a common Ferrule Numbering system is to form Ferrule Numbers
from Terminal Numbers (where the wire end is connected to) + Equipment Numbers at the
other end of wires.
Automatic Wire Ferruling can be applied by:
• Project (i.e. all wire ferrules use the same Ferrule Rule)
• Equipment Type (e.g. a Junction Box uses rule 1, a Field Device uses rule 2, DCS I/O
Module rule 3 etc)
• Equipment instance (e.g. JB-03 uses rule 1, Gas JB-05 uses rule 2, MR-01 uses rule 3
etc).
When Wiring Manager applies Ferrule Rules as follows:
1. Wiring Manager first checks if the specific Equipment item has a Ferrule Rule - if so it is
applied, if not it goes to step 2.
2. Wiring Manager then checks if the Equipment Type has a Ferrule Rule - if so it is
applied, if not it goes to step 3.
Wiring Manager then checks if a project 'Default Ferrule Rule' is set - if so it is applied, if not
automatic Ferrule Numbering is not applied.

8.2.1 Ferrule Rule Definition


To define or edit existing Auto Ferrule Rules, click Setup on the Project tab, then click
Ferrule Rules Definitions.
This displays the Ferrule Rules window:

This window shows all the Ferrule Rules for the current project.
To create a new Ferrule Rule, click New. The Ferrule Rule window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

Enter a unique name for the Rule in the Ferrule Rule Name field.
Optionally, in the Example field, enter an example of what a Ferrule Number created using
the rule will look like.
To define the way the Ferrule Numbers will be created using the rule, select the DataLink
field list:

Select the DataLinks or delimiters (/ \ - etc) as required to make up the new Ferrule Number
Rule by click their checkboxes.
As each DataLink is selected it is added to the DataLink field. Unchecking a checkbox
removes a selected Datalink.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

In the example below the Ferrule Rule has been defined as: {EqNo-OtherEnd}/{TNo-
OtherEnd}.

If this example rule was applied to a wire at a Junction Box that is connected to terminal
number 20 in MR-1, then Wiring Manager will create the following ferrule number: 20/MR-1.
If checked, the Default checkbox makes the current rule the default for all wire terminations
in the project.
If the rule is to be applied to specific equipment types then check the Apply by Equipment
Type checkbox. This enables the pane at the bottom of the window.
To select an Equipment type, click Add. A record row is then added to the pane.
Select the required type from the list available from the Equipment Type field:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

Different Ferrule Rules can be assigned to left and right sides of internal components. From
the list available from the Side(s) field select Both (the default), Left or Right as required.
Repeat until all required equipment types have been selected.
To remove an equipment type, select it in the pane and click Remove.
To save the new rule, click Save.

Note: Refer to the Assign Ferrule Rules to Equipment for how to assign Ferrule Rules to
specific Equipment items.

To edit a Ferrule Rule, select it from the list in the Ferrule Rules window and click Edit. The
Ferrule Rule window is then displayed.
To delete a Ferrule Rule, select it from the list in the Ferrule Rules window and click
Delete. A message is then displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes.

8.2.2 Assign Ferrule Rules to Equipment


To assign a Ferrule Rule to a specific Equipment tag. click Select in the Grids and
Schedules section of the Home tab.
Select Equipment Ferrule Rules from the list of grids that is then displayed. The
Equipment Ferrule Rules grid is then displayed:

Note: Ferrule Rules can also be assigned to Equipment Types when a rule is defined.
Refer to Ferrule Rule Definition.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

To assign (or re-assign) Ferrule Rules, select the Equipment records to assign Ferrule
Rules to click Edit in the Records section of the Home or List Tools tabs.
The Ferrule Rules window is displayed:

Different Ferrule Rules can be assigned to left and right sides of internal components.
Select the required Ferrule Rule(s) from the lists in the Left and Right fields.
Click Save to assign the selections.

8.2.3 Updating Ferrule Nos by Ferrule Rules


Once Ferrule Rules have been defined they can be applied to wire/cable terminations.

Note: For this feature to be used, the Use Auto Ferrule Numbering Rules option must be
checked in the Wiring Manager's Options window.

Update Ferrule Numbers by Equipment


Proceed as follows:
• In the Equipment View, right-click on the required Equipment record, click Auto
Ferrule Selected Equipment on the menu then displayed, then select the Left, Right,
or Both option as required from the sub-menu.
• Or in the Equipment Layout window (refer to Equipment Layout), right-click on the
required equipment, click Auto Ferrule Selected Equipment on the menu then
displayed, then select the Left, Right, or Both option as required from the sub-menu.
• Or in the Equipment List select the required Equipment record(s), then click Auto
Ferrule selected Equipment in the Actions section of the List Tools - Equipment
Ferrule Rules tab and select the Left, Right, or Both option as required from the drop-
down menu.
• Or in the Equipment Ferrule Rules list (see Assign Ferrule Rules to Equipment) select
the required Equipment record(s), then click Auto Ferrule selected Equipment in the
Actions section of the List Tools - Equipment List tab and select the Left, Right, or
Both option as required from the drop-down menu.
Wiring Manager will then update/create Ferrule Numbers based on the Ferrule Rules
applied to the equipment, equipment type or project for the selected equipment.

Update Ferrule Numbers by Cable


In the Cable Schedule, select the required Cable record(s), then click Auto Ferrule
selected Cables in the Actions section of the List Tools - Cable Schedule tab and select
the Left, Right, or Both option as required from the drop-down menu.
Wiring Manager will then and update/create Ferrule Numbers based on the Ferrule Rules
applied to the equipment, equipment type or project for the selected cables.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

8.3 Viewing Ferrule Markings


To view the ferrule markings/numbers for an item of equipment:
• Select the equipment in the Equipment List, and click View Ferrule Markings in the
Tools section of the List Tools - Equipment List tab.
• Or in the Equipment Layout window (refer to Equipment Layout), right-click on the
required equipment, click Ferrule No Report on the menu then displayed.
A window is then displayed, listing the markings/numbers for the equipment. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Wire Numbering

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 8:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

9 Cable Block Diagrams

Wiring Manager includes a Cable Block Diagram application that provides interactive
access to project equipment and cabling. Users can view and edit Cable properties as if
they were using Wiring Manager's Cable Schedule data grid, view and edit Equipment,
including terminations as if they were using Wiring Manager's Equipment View.
A Cable Block Diagram gives designers a graphical view of the project's cabling and in
many situations allows easier navigation and visualisation for complex interconnections.
The Wiring Manager Cable Block Diagram application includes auto-layout capabilities and
allows printing to hard-copy. It supports saving and re-opening of diagrams, and the ability
to export to AutoCAD DWG format. The application provides full interactive access to all
underlying Wiring Manager objects for editing purposes.
There are two types of Cable Block Diagram, Basic and Enhanced. The type is selected
when a diagram is created. Basic Cable Block Diagrams are constructed from a simple set
of symbols supplied with the product. Enhanced Cable Block Diagrams are constructed
from user-defined symbols created for the project (refer to Add or Edit Cable Block Diagram
Symbols for details).

Access the Cable Block Diagram Application


To access the Cable Block Diagram facility, click Select in the Grids and Schedules
section of the Home tab.
Select Cable Block Diagrams from the list of grids that is then displayed. The Cable Block
Diagram grid is then displayed:

Cable Block Diagrams Grid Layout


The Cable Block Diagrams grid layout can be set by the user using the Grid Manager utility
(select Manager in the Grids and Schedules section of the Home tab). The Grid Manager
allows users to define Views, that is, which fields should be viewable in the grid, their default
position (column order), column size, default sort order and whether a data filter is applied

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

(e.g. Show only 'New' cables). New Grid Views can be saved for use by individuals or for
entire project teams and existing Views selected. Refer to Grid Manager for more
information.
Up to 10 user-defined fields, i.e. fields with user-defined names, may be added to the grid if
required. Refer to Options for details. Users may enter data into these fields, and the
Description field, directly. The other fields are display-only.

Cable Block Diagrams - List Tools Options


The following options are located on the List Tools - Diagrams tab:

Records Section

Refresh

New These common options are also located on the Home tab.
Edit Refer to the Common Functionality User Guide for details.

Delete

Actions Section

Open Opens the cable block diagram currently selected in the grid for
editing. Refer to Create or Edit Content of a Basic Cable Block
Diagram and Create or Edit Content of an Enhanced Cable Block
Diagram.

Drawing/Grid Section

Enhanced Cable Used to access a window in which aspects of the appearance and
Block Diagram layout of Enhanced Cable Block Diagrams (colours, line
Options thicknesses, spacings etc), printing, export and grid setting
preferences can be specified. Refer to Enhanced Cable Block
Diagram Options for details.

9.1 Create a New Cable Block Diagram


To create a new cable block diagram, open the Cable Block Diagrams grid and click New in
the Records section of the Home tab.
The Cable Block Diagram Information window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Enter a unique identifier for the new diagram in the Document No field and a description in
the Description field. If the diagram is to be a basic cable block diagram, click the Basic
button, if it is to be an enhanced cable block diagram, click the Enhanced button.
Click OK. The new diagram is then created, and a new window is displayed in which the
content can be added and edited.

Note: The cable block diagram description can subsequently be edited by changing it in the
grid. The name and diagram type cannot be edited.

Continue at:
• Create or Edit Content of a Basic Cable Block Diagram
• Create or Edit Content of an Enhanced Cable Block Diagram

9.2 Create or Edit Content of a Basic Cable Block


Diagram
The content of basic cable block diagrams is added and edited using the Cable Block
Diagram window. This is opened from the Open option in the Actions section of the
Diagrams tab, or by double-clicking on its record in the Cable Block Diagrams grid.
It is also displayed automatically when a basic diagram is first created (refer to Create a
New Cable Block Diagram).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

If there have been any changes to the items on the diagram since it was last saved, the
Refresh Summary window is displayed, listing these changes.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Cable Block Diagram Basic Operations


To move equipment around a diagram, click on the equipment tag (or near the equipment
edge) and drag the item to a new location. Wiring Manager will reposition any cables
connected to the moved equipment including the cable numbers.
Users can also move any cable number flags by dragging them. If a flag is moved off a
cable line, a line is then added between the cable the cable flag.
To remove an equipment item from the diagram, select it (click on it) and press the delete
<Del> key. To remove a cable, select the cable and press the delete <Del> key.

Note: Using the Delete key removes selected objects from the current diagram. It does not
delete the object from the project database.

Wiring Manager allows multiple selections:


• By “windowing”: select any point not on an object and drag a rectangle. Everything
within the rectangle window is selected
• By using the Layout menu option Select All.

Zooming and Panning


Use the zoom commands on the toolbar to change the zoom factor.
The Overview window (activated from the Zoom pull-down menu option) enables dynamic
zooming when a user changes the internal green window size and dynamic panning by
dragging the small green window within the Overview window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Users may also perform a dynamic pan by clicking on the main Cable Block Diagram
window with the middle mouse button. This action displays a small dynamic pan icon. Any
movement of the mouse will dynamically pan the diagram. End dynamic panning by clicking
anywhere in the window.
Continue at:
• Add Existing Equipment and Cables to Basic Cable Block Diagrams
• Interactive Features
• Changing a Cable End (Destination)
• Add Equipment
• Create a New Project Cable
• Field Device Wiring Facilities
• Cable Drawing Styles

9.2.1 Add Existing Equipment and Cables to Basic Cable Block Diagrams
From the Wiring Manager Equipment View, click on an Equipment node drag the selected
Equipment node onto the diagram and drop it on the canvas.
Wiring Manager will then add the selected equipment and optionally connected Equipment,
cables and field devices. In the example below, the centre Junction Box was 'dragged' onto
the document.

Note: Whether or not interconnected equipment etc is added is controlled by a Options


setting. A separate option to specifically exclude field devices from being added is
also available.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

In the above example Equipment node 01-JB-002 (a junction box) was dragged from the
Equipment View to the Diagram and all its connected equipment was added to the left and
right along with all the connecting cables. The cable number is shown within the flag
(rectangle) and the cable type is shown above each cable number. This also shows a 'Note'
which can be added at any time.

Note: Users can also drag Equipment from the Wiring Manager Equipment List gridview
and can drag Cables from the Wiring Manager Cable Schedule gridview.

Add other existing Equipment or add new project equipment by right-clicking on the blank
canvas and selecting the required option from the menu that is then displayed:

Refer to Create a New Equipment Tag, Select Existing Equipment from a List and Add
Multiple Equipment Wizard for details of these options.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

9.2.2 Interactive Features


Users can view and edit engineering data directly within a cable block diagram by right-
clicking on any object and selecting the appropriate command.
To view and edit cable properties, right-click on any cable. A menu is then displayed:

Click Cable Properties. The Cable Details window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

See Edit Project Cable Data for details.


To view and edit equipment details, right-click on any Equipment node. A menu is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Edit Detail.


The Equipment Detail window is then displayed:

Refer to Equipment Layout for information on adding/editing internal components (Terminal


Strips, Devices, I/O Modules and Earth Bars).
To view and edit equipment/cable terminations, right-click on any Equipment node. A pop-up
menu is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Edit Terminations.


The Terminations window is then displayed:

Refer to Terminations for details.

9.2.3 Changing a Cable End (Destination)


Any cable in the Cable Block Diagram can be reconnected to another Equipment node.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

To change a cable's end to another equipment, click on the cable so it is highlighted. When
a cable is highlighted, there will be a small green diamond shape shown at each end of the
cable:

Drag the small green diamond shape to move that end of the cable to another equipment
node.
Release the mouse (dropping the end) on the equipment. Wiring Manager will then redraw
the cable to the new equipment.
Changing the a cable end using this method disconnects all cores terminated at the old
equipment and updates the cable schedule for the dragged cable end.

9.2.4 Add Equipment


Equipment may be added to a diagram by:
• Dragging and dropping existing equipment from the Wiring Manager Equipment View
or Equipment List grid. Refer to Drag and Drop.
• Dragging and dropping an existing cable from Cable Schedule grid. Connected
equipment is added as well. Refer to Create a New Cable by Dragging.
• Adding existing interconnected equipment by right-clicking on any equipment node
within a diagram and selecting the Add Interconnected Equipment menu option.
Refer to Add Interconnected Equipment.
• Creating a new equipment tag. Refer to Create a New Equipment Tag.
• Selecting from a list of existing equipment. Refer to Select Existing Equipment from a
List.
• Using the Add Multiple Equipment wizard. Refer to Add Multiple Equipment Wizard.

Drag and Drop


To add existing equipment and cables to the Cable Block Diagram by dragging and
dropping:
• In the Equipment View, click on an Equipment node, drag the selected Equipment node
onto the diagram and drop it on the canvas.
• Or, in the Equipment List, click on an Equipment record, drag the selected Equipment
record (select just to the left of the 'Pin' icon) onto the Diagram and drop it on the
canvas.
• Or, in the Cable Schedule, click on an Cable record drag the selected Cable record
(select just to the left of the 'Pin' icon) onto the Diagram and drop it on the canvas.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Wiring Manager will then add the selected equipment or cable, and depending on the
preferences set, all connected Equipment and cables as shown in this example:

In the above example Equipment node 01-JB-002 (a junction box) was dragged from the
Equipment View to the Diagram and all its interconnected equipment was added to the left
and right along with all interconnecting cables. The cable number is shown within the flag
(rectangle) and the cable type is shown above each cable number.

Note: Whether or not interconnected equipment etc is added is controlled by a Options


setting. A separate option to specifically exclude field devices from being added is
also available.

Add Interconnected Equipment


To add existing equipment and cables to the Cable Block Diagram based on
interconnectivity, right-click on any Equipment node. A pop-up menu is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Add Interconnected Equipment.


Wiring Manager automatically adds all equipment and cables from the selected equipment
that are not already shown in the Diagram.

Note: Connected equipment, cables and field devices can be added using this option
regardless of the Auto Add Interconnected Equip and Exclude Field Devices
Options settings.

Create a New Equipment Tag


To create a new equipment tag:
• Open the Equipment menu and click Create New.
• Or, right-click on the drawing canvas (not on any existing entity), and from the pop-up
menu select Add New Equipment.
The Equipment Information window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

After entering the new tag's data (see Create New Equipment for details), click Save to
create the equipment. Wiring Manager will place the new equipment on the diagram.

Note: To see the new equipment tag in the Equipment View, select Refresh from the
Records section of the Home tab.

Select Existing Equipment from a List


Right-click on the drawing canvas (not on any existing entity) and from the pop-up menu
select Add Existing Equipment. The Select Equipment window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

To add equipment to a diagram, check their Select checkboxes and then click the Select
button.

Add Multiple Equipment Wizard


Right-click on the drawing canvas (not on any existing entity) and from the pop-up menu
select Add Multiple Equipment. The Add Multiple New Equipment wizard window is then
displayed. For details, refer to Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment.
Equipment created or imported using the wizard is automatically added to the diagram.

9.2.5 Create a New Project Cable


New project cables can be created between any equipment in a diagram, either by:
• Using the dragging tool. Refer to Create a New Cable by Dragging.
• Selecting the source and destination equipment. Refer to Create a New Cable by
Selecting Equipment.

Create a New Cable by Dragging


A new cable can be added between equipment on a diagram by using the dragging tool.
Click in the centre of the source equipment node, then, while holding down the mouse
button “drag” the cursor towards the destination equipment node. A new cable will be
displayed “behind” the cursor while the user does this, i.e. the cursor will appear to be
dragging a cable away from the destination equipment.
When the cursor touches the destination equipment node, end the drag (i.e.stop pressing
the mouse button). The new cable will then be added and displayed between the two
equipment nodes.
A cable is not added to the cable schedule (i.e. the project database) until the user enters
and saves its properties. To do this, right-click on the cable and select the Cable Properties
option. The Cable Details window is then displayed, with the From and To equipment fields
completed. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Create a New Cable by Selecting Equipment


Users can also create a new cable by selecting two equipment nodes, then selecting the
Create New option from the Cables menu.
First make sure nothing is selected. Next select the 'From' equipment (click on the
equipment node). Then, holding the <Ctrl> key down, select the 'To' equipment (click the its
node).
With two nodes selected, click Cables toolbar menu and select Create New.
The Cable Details window is then displayed, with the From and To equipment fields
completed. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for details.
Enter the required cable details (including selection of a cable number and catalogue cable)
and save. The new cable is then added to the cable schedule and to the diagram.

9.2.6 Field Device Wiring Facilities


The right-click menu for Field Devices in a diagram includes two options relating to wiring:
Show Signal Path and Show Wiring Check Report.

The Show Signal Path option highlights the path of the field device signal on a diagram
with an animated dashed line. For example:

Select the Stop Animation option from the Cables menu to stop the animation and remove
the highlighting.
The Show Wiring Check Report option displays the Wiring Check Report for the device.
For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Refer to Field Device Wiring Reports for details of these reports.

9.2.7 Cable Drawing Styles


Wiring Manager supports three drawing styles for cable:
1. Single straight lines (users can manually add 'bend points' as required).
2. Orthogonal Lines (cables are always drawn with vertical and/or horizontal segments).
3. Bezier - curved lines (cable lines are drawn single curved segments).
The following figure shows examples of these cable styles:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

The two bottom cables are 'Orthogonal' (type 2), left most is 'Straight' (type 1), top and right
are 'Bezier' - curved (type 3).
Any cable can have its style changed at any time. Right-click on them, and from the menu
then displayed, select Make Orthogonal or Make Straight as required.
The default style is set on the Visualisation tab of the Options window.

9.3 Create or Edit Content of an Enhanced Cable Block


Diagram
The content of enhanced cable block diagrams is added and edited using a window with the
same name as the diagram. This is opened from the Open option in the Actions section of
the Home tab, or by double-clicking on its record in the Cable Block Diagrams grid.
It is also displayed automatically when an enhanced diagram is first created (refer to Create
a New Cable Block Diagram).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

If an item that was on the diagram has subsequently been deleted from the database, a
message is displayed to inform the use of this. For example:

View Options
The following facilities are located at the bottom of the window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

• To zoom in and out use the Scale slider, the plus and minus buttons, or hold down the
Ctrl key and move the mouse wheel up (to zoom in) or down (to zoom out).
• If panning is enabled by clicking the Enable Panning button (it is off by default), the
diagram can be navigated around by left-clicking and dragging the mouse in the
required direction.
• Click Scale to Fit to zoom out or in so that contents of the diagram fit the window.
• To display a small window in the bottom-right corner of the main window displaying an
overview of the diagram, click Overview. For example:

Click on a symbol or cable on the drawing to centre the main window on that drawing
element.
Click the button again to close the overview.

Select Drawing Elements


To select single item, left-click on it or its label. The selected item is surrounded by a green
box.
To select multiple items either:
• Select items by left-clicking on their symbols or text and holding down the Shift key. The
first item selected is surrounded by a green box, subsequent items by a blue box.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

• Drawing a “box” around the items to be selected by left-clicking on one corner of the
box dragging the cursor, while holding down the left mouse button to the opposite
corner. A pink box is drawn around the selected area. Release the mouse button. All
items fully in the box are then selected and are surrounded by blue boxes.
• Press Ctrl+A to select everything on the drawing, or select the Select All option from
the Edit menu. All items are surrounded by blue boxes.

Move Drawing Elements


To move drawing element, select them (see above) and drag them to the required location.
Connected cables will stretch etc to maintain connections.

Toolbar Options

Save Layout Saves changes to the drawing.

Refresh Manually refreshes the drawing with changes to the layout and to
item details that were not automatically implemented in the
drawing.
In the case of Key One Line diagrams, interconnected equipment
may also be added by refreshing the diagram. See Refresh the
Diagram.

Show Grid Used to toggle the display of the drawing grid on and off (it is on
by default).

Snap to Grid Used to toggle the snapping of drawing elements to the grid on
and off (it is on by default).

Layout Accesses a drop-down menu with two options:

Align Used to align all selected equipment


Horizontally horizontally. All selected items are aligned
(Top) with the first item selected.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Align Vertically Used to align all selected equipment


(Left) vertically. All selected items are aligned with
the first item selected.

Enable Panning Toggles panning on and off (it is off by default). When toggling is
on the diagram can be navigated around by left-clicking and
dragging the mouse in the required direction.

Print Preview Toggles the print preview of the diagram. When print preview
mode is on, previews of the pages as they would be printed are
displayed as part of the diagram (over the grid, if this is being
displayed), so that the user can see which items will appear on
which pages. For example:

Print Used to print the diagram. Opens a standard Print window.

Export Accesses a drop-down menu with two options:

Export to PDF Used to export the diagram to a PDF file.


Opens a standard Save file as window.

Export to Used to export the diagram to a DWG file.


AutoCAD Opens a standard Save file as window

Add Existing Used to select existing equipment to add to the diagram. Refer to
Equipment Select Existing Equipment from a List for details.

Close Closes the diagram window.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Menu Options

File Menu
File Saves changes to the drawing.

Export to PDF Used to export the diagram to a PDF file. Opens a standard
Save file as window.

Export to AutoCAD Used to export the diagram to a DWG file. Opens a


standard Save file as window

Print Used to print the diagram. Opens a standard Print window.

Exit Closes the diagram window.

Edit Menu
Select All Used to select all equipment and cables on the diagram.

Delete All Used to delete all equipment and cables from the diagram.
A message is displayed requesting that the deletion be
confirmed.

Note: Equipment and cables deleted from the diagram in


this way are not deleted from the project database.
See also Delete Symbols and Cables.

Find Equipment Used to find and select equipment and field devices in the
diagram. Displays the Search window:

From the field, a drop-down list of all the equipment and


field device tag numbers in the diagram is accessible.
Select the required tag number. Click Find. The item with
that tag number is then selected in the diagram.
Alternatively, enter part or all of a tag number in the field,
checking the Match Case checkbox if required. Click Find.
The first item in the diagram that matches the entered
search criteria is then selected in the diagram. Click Find
Next to select the next matching item, if there is one.
If there are no matches, a message will be displayed to
inform the user of this.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Equipment Menu
Add All Interconnected Used to the all the equipment connected to the equipment
currently in the diagram. Refer to Add Interconnected
Equipment for details.

Add Interconnected Used to add the field devices connected to selected


Field Device equipment to the diagram. Refer to Add Interconnected
Equipment for details.

Remove All Field Used to remove all field devices from the diagram (they are
Devices not deleted from the project database).

Add Existing Equipment Used to select existing equipment to add to the diagram.
Refer to Add Equipment and Cables for details.

Stop Animation Used to stop the animation that indicates field device wiring
paths. Refer to Field Device Wiring Facilities for details.

Cable Menu
Create New Used to convert connections between equipment into
project cables. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for
details.

Layout Menu
Align Horizontally (Top) Used to align all selected equipment horizontally. All
selected items are aligned with the first item selected.

Align Vertically (Left) Used to align all selected equipment vertically. All selected
items are aligned with the first item selected.

Drawing Page Right-Click Menus


Right-click on the drawing page (i.e. not on any drawing element) to display the following
options:
• Add Existing Equipment: used to select existing equipment to add to the diagram.
• Save Layout: saves the layout.
• Refresh: refreshes the diagram.
For more information see Toolbar Options.
Continue at:
• Add Equipment and Cables
• Change Symbols
• Create a New Project Cable
• Edit Symbols and Cables
• Edit Appearance of Cable Labels
• View and Edit Terminations
• View Termination Reports
• Field Device Wiring Facilities
• Delete Symbols and Cables
• Refresh the Diagram

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

9.3.1 Add Equipment and Cables


New equipment may be added to a diagram by dragging the required symbol type from the
Symbols panel. Refer to Create a New Equipment Tag.
Existing equipment may be added to a diagram by:
• Dragging and dropping existing equipment from the Wiring Manager Equipment View
or Equipment List grid. Refer to Drag and Drop.
• Dragging and dropping an existing cable from the Cable Schedule grid. Connected
equipment is added as well. Refer to Drag and Drop.
• Adding existing interconnected equipment by right-clicking on any equipment node
within a diagram and selecting the Add Interconnected Equipment menu option.
Refer to Add Interconnected Equipment.
• Selecting from a list of existing equipment. Refer to Select Existing Equipment from a
List.
In addition to the above facilities, existing field devices can be added to the diagram using
the Add Interconnected Field Device menu option.

Create a New Equipment Tag


From the Symbols panel on the left-hand side of the window, select the symbol standard to
be used from the required symbol library, as selected from the Library list.
The symbols in the standard are then displayed in the Symbols panel. They are divided into
categories: Field Devices, Local Control Stations, and PLC Cabinets, which can be hidden
and revealed by clicking the arrow down next to a category title.
To add a symbol to the drawing, click on it in the Symbols panel and then drag and drop at
the required position on the drawing page.
When new equipment is added to the drawing, the Equipment Information window is
displayed (see Create New Equipment for details), in which the user must enter details of
the equipment.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

When field devices are added to a diagram, the Instrument Tag window is also displayed
(see Add Field Devices for details).

Drag and Drop


To add existing equipment and cables to the Cable Block Diagram by dragging and
dropping:
• In the Equipment View, click on an Equipment node, drag the selected Equipment node
onto the diagram and drop it into the diagram.
• Or, in the Equipment List, click on an Equipment record, drag the selected Equipment
record (select just to the left of the 'Pin' icon) onto the Diagram and drop it into the
diagram.
• Or, in the Cable Schedule, click on an Cable record drag the selected Cable record
(select just to the left of the 'Pin' icon) onto the Diagram and drop it into the diagram.
Wiring Manager will then add the selected equipment or cable, and depending on the
preferences set, all connected Equipment and cables as shown in this example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:27 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

In the above example Equipment node 01-JB-001 was dragged from the Equipment View to
the Diagram and all its interconnected equipment was added to the left and right along with
all interconnecting cables.

Note: Whether or not interconnected equipment etc is added is controlled by a Options


setting. A separate option to specifically exclude field devices from being added is
also available.

Add Interconnected Equipment


To add existing equipment, field devices and cables to the Cable Block Diagram based on
interconnectivity with a selected item of equipment, right-click on any Equipment symbol. A
pop-up menu is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:28 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Add Interconnected Equipment.


Wiring Manager automatically adds all equipment and cables from the selected equipment
that are not already shown in the diagram.

Note: Connected equipment, cables and field devices can be added using this option
regardless of the Auto Add Interconnected Equip and Exclude Field Devices
Options settings.

To add any existing field devices connected to a selected item of equipment, select an
equipment symbol, then from the Equipment menu, select the Add Interconnected Field
Device menu option.
To add all equipment either directly connected to the equipment already in the diagram, or
connected both directly and via other equipment, select the Add All Interconnected option
from the Equipment menu. The Auto Add Equipment window is then displayed:

Add only add equipment directly connected to the current equipment in the diagram, select
the Single Pass option and click OK.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:29 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

To add all equipment connected either directly or indirectly via other equipment, select the
Add Everything option and click OK.

Select Existing Equipment from a List


Either click the Add Existing Equipment option from the Equipment menu, or right-click
on the drawing (not on any symbol or line) and from the menu that is then displayed select
Add Existing Equipment.
The Select Equipment window is then displayed:

To add equipment to a diagram, check their Select checkboxes and then click the Select
button.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:30 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

9.3.2 Change Symbols


Right-click on any symbol to display the Change Symbol option. Select this option to
displayed the Symbol List window:

The window displays all the different project symbols for the selected item type (see Add or
Edit Cable Block Diagram Symbols). The Default Symbol checkbox indicates the default
symbol set for the type of item.
Select a different symbol either by double-clicking on it or clicking on it and clicking Select.
The window then exits and the symbol on the drawing is replaced by the selected symbol.
Equipment symbols can also be changed using Equipment List facilities. Refer to Change
Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Symbols for details.

9.3.3 Create a New Project Cable


New cables are created by:
• Manually connecting symbols by dragging a line between them. Refer to Manually
Connect Symbols. See also Delete Connections.
The connections must then be made into project cables by entering their details. Refer
to Change Connections into Cable and Enter Details.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:31 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

• Selecting two equipment symbols and then selecting the Create New option from the
Cables menu. Create Cables by Selecting Equipment.

Manually Connect Symbols


To manually connect one symbol to another, hover the cursor over the symbol of what is to
be the ‘from’ equipment. The cursor will change to a hand symbol when it is hovered over a
connection point:

Left-click at the required connection point, and then drag the cursor towards the equipment
that the cable is to be connected to, i.e. the ‘to’ equipment. The selected symbol is
highlighted in pink. As the cursor is dragged towards the ‘to’ equipment, a blue line ending in
an arrow is drawn on the diagram from the selected equipment point to the position of the
mouse cursor.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:32 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Connect the end of the line to the ‘to’ equipment symbol. That symbol is highlighted in pink
as well.

Release the mouse button. The connection is then made, as indicated by the blue line
between the two items.

To make the connection into a project cable, continue at Change Connections into Cable
and Enter Details.

Delete Connections
To delete a connection before it has been made into a cable, right-click on it and select
Delete from the menu that is then displayed. The connection is then deleted.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:33 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Change Connections into Cable and Enter Details


To create a cable from a connection between two items, right-click on the connection and
select Create Cable from the menu that is then displayed.
The Cable Details window is then displayed, with the From and To equipment fields
completed. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for details.
Enter the required cable details (including selection of a cable number and catalogue cable)
and save. The new cable is then added to the cable schedule and to the diagram, and
labelled using the cable label symbol set as the default for the project.
Once a connection becomes a project cable its colour changes from blue to black.

Note: Cable label symbols may be hidden, moved, rotated or changed for a other symbol if
required, as explained in Edit Appearance of Cable Labels.

Create Cables by Selecting Equipment


Users can also create a connections by selecting two equipment symbols, then selecting
the Create New option from the Cables menu.
Select the 'From' equipment (click on the equipment symbol). Then, holding the <Ctrl> key
down, select the 'To' equipment (click the its symbol).
With the two symbols selected, select the Cables menu and click Create New.
The Cable Details window is then displayed, with the From and To equipment fields
completed. Refer to Create a New Project Cable for details.
Enter the required cable details (including selection of a cable number and catalogue cable)
and save. The new cable is then added to the cable schedule and to the diagram as a red
line, and labelled using the cable label symbol set as the default for the project.

Note: Cable label symbols may be hidden, moved, rotated or changed for a other symbol if
required, as explained in Edit Appearance of Cable Labels.

9.3.4 Edit Symbols and Cables


To edit equipment or a cable, or right-click on it and select the Edit Details or Edit Cable
option from the menu that is then displayed.
The appropriate detail window for the item is then displayed.
For details, continue at:
• Equipment Layout for equipment other than field devices.
• Add Field Devices for field devices.
• Edit Project Cable Data for cables.

9.3.5 Edit Appearance of Cable Labels


Cables are labelled using the default “label symbol” specified for the project (see Add or Edit
Cable Block Diagram Symbols). Cable label symbols consist of the datalinks required to
label cables. The appearance of the actual cables themselves is pre-defined and cannot
edited.
Cable label symbols may be moved, rotated, changed for a other symbol or hidden f
required.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:34 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Change Cable Label Symbol Anchor


To change the anchor point of a cable label symbol, right-click on the label and select Label
Anchor from the menu that is then displayed. From the sub-menu, select the required
anchor point, e.g. Top Left, Top Middle, etc:

Rotate Cable Label Symbol


To rotate a cable label symbol 90°, right-click on the label and select Rotate Label Symbol
from the menu that is then displayed. From the sub-menu, select the required direction of
rotation, clockwise or anti-clockwise.
The label is then rotated 90° in the selected direction.

Change Cable Label Symbol


Cable label symbols are changed to another cable label symbol in the same way as
equipment and field device symbols. Right-click on the label and select Change Label
Symbol from the menu that is then displayed.
The Symbol List window is then displayed. Refer to Change Symbols for details.

Hide and Show Cable Label Symbol


To hide the label of a cable, right-click on either the label or the cable and select Hide Cable
Label Symbol from the menu that is then displayed. The label is then hidden.
To show the label again, right-click on either the label or the cable and select Show Cable
Label Symbol from the menu.

9.3.6 View and Edit Terminations


To view and edit equipment/cable terminations, right-click on the equipment symbol. A pop-
up menu is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:35 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Edit Terminations. The Terminations window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:36 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Refer to Terminations for details.

9.3.7 View Termination Reports


To view a report detailing the terminations of an equipment item, right-click on the
equipment symbol. A pop-up menu is then displayed:

From the menu, select either the Termination Report option.


The Termination Report window is then displayed. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:37 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

For further details, refer to Termination Reports.

9.3.8 Field Device Wiring Facilities


The right-click menu for Field Devices in a diagram includes two options relating to wiring:
Show Signal Path and Show Wiring Check Report.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:38 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

The Show Signal Path option highlights the path of the field device signal on a diagram.
For example:

Select the Stop Animation option from the Equipment menu to stop the animation and
remove the highlighting.
The Show Wiring Check Report option displays the Wiring Check Report for the device.
For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:39 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Refer to Field Device Wiring Reports for details of these reports.

9.3.9 Delete Symbols and Cables


To delete a symbol or cable, right-click on it and select the Delete Equipment or (for cables)
the Delete option from the menu that is then displayed, or select it and press the Delete key

Note: Use the second method to delete multiple items. The right-click menu will not be
displayed if multiple items are selected.

The Delete Options window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:40 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

If the symbols and/or cables are to be deleted both from the diagram and the database, click
Delete from Diagram and Database. If they are to be deleted from the diagram but the
equipment/cables they represent are to remain in the database, click Delete from Diagram
only.
Click OK to implement the selected deletion option.
Note that if both the source and destination of a cable is deleted from the diagram, the cable
will not also be deleted (unless selected for deletion as well), i.e. it will remain in the cable
schedule but with its From and To equipment fields blank.

Remove All Field Devices


All field devices can be deleted from the diagram by selecting the Remove All Field
Devices from the Equipment menu. Every field device in the diagram is then deleted from
the diagram. The field devices are not deleted from the project database.

Delete All Option


The diagram can be cleared, i.e. all equipment and cables can be deleted from it, by
selecting the Delete All option from the Edit menu. A message is displayed requesting that
the deletion be confirmed.
Equipment and cables deleted from the diagram in this way are not deleted from the project
database.

9.3.10 Refresh the Diagram


To refresh the data displayed on the diagram and optionally add new interconnected
equipment to the diagram, click the Refresh button.
The Refresh Options window is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:41 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Refresh data only if only the data on the diagram is to be updated.
Click Refresh data and add interconnected if the data on the diagram is to be updated,
and interconnected equipment is to be added to the diagram.
Once the required option has been selected, click OK to refresh the diagram.

9.4 Options
User options can be set for Cable Block Diagrams. Different sets of options are available for
Basic and Enhanced diagram types.
Continue at:
• Basic Cable Block Diagram Options
• Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Options

9.4.1 Basic Cable Block Diagram Options


To set Basic Cable Block Diagram options, from the Basic Cable Block Diagrams File menu,
select Options.
The Basic Cable Block Diagram Options window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:42 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Visualisation Tab

The visualisation options effect how basic cable block diagrams are drawn.

Note: Changes to these options will not effect any object already on a diagram.

Drawing Styles
Draw Orthogonal If this checkbox is checked, cables will be drawn at right
angles (at 0 or 180 degrees only).

Curved Bends Adds a small curve to all cable corners.

Size Preferences
These setting effect the size of various components when added to a Cable Block
Diagram.

Equipment Spacing

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:43 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Vertical Spacing This setting controls the vertical spacings of automatically


added interconnections and layouts.

Horizontal Spacing This setting controls the horizontal spacings of automatically


added interconnections and layouts.

Other Settings
Auto Add If this checkbox is checked, all interconnected cables and
Interconnected Equip equipment are automatically added when existing
equipment is added (except optionally field devices - see
below).

Exclude Field Devices This option excludes field devices from being automatically
added when interconnected equipment and cables are
automatically added.

Show Instrumentation This option controls whether or not cables created in AVEVA
Cables Instrumentation for the project (if the project is shared with
Instrumentation) can added to diagrams.

Show Electrical Cables This option is disabled in Electrical.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:44 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Printing Tab

Printing preferences are used to define printing settings for Cable Block Diagrams, including
Header and Footer text.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:45 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Export Tab

The Export tab is used to define Cable Block Diagram settings for exports to AutoCAD.
The default scaling and widths shown are suitable for metric AutoCAD drawings. For
imperial units (inches), dividing the above units by approximately 25 is suggested.
Tag numbers and cable numbers are created by inserting predefined AutoCAD blocks into
each AutoCAD cable block diagram on export. Users can modify the blocks by editing
CBDCableNo and CBDTagNo drawings in the project's 'block' folder shown at the bottom of
the tab.

9.4.2 Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Options


To set Enhanced Cable Block Diagram preferences select the Enhanced Cable Block
Diagram Options option in the Options section of the Diagrams tab.
The Enhanced Cable Block Diagram Options window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:46 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Visualisation Tab

The visualisation preferences effect how basic cable block diagrams are drawn.

Drawing Styles
Draw Orthogonal If this checkbox is checked, cables will be drawn at right
angles (at 0 or 180 degrees only).

Curved Bends Adds a small curve to all cable corners.

Equipment Spacing
Vertical Spacing This setting controls the vertical spacings of automatically
added interconnections and layouts.

Horizontal Spacing This setting controls the horizontal spacings of automatically


added interconnections and layouts.

Size Preferences
Cable No - Equipment Controls the distance between the labels of cables and
Offset equipment.

Assignment (Link)

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:47 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Thickness Controls the thickness of links between symbols that have


not been converted into cables.

Diagram Grid
Controls the height and width of the cells of the diagram grid.

Other Settings
Auto Add If this checkbox is checked, all interconnected cables and
Interconnected Equip equipment are automatically added when existing
equipment is added (except optionally field devices - see
below).

Exclude Field Devices This option excludes field devices from being automatically
added when interconnected equipment and cables are
automatically added.

Show Instrumentation This option controls whether or not cables created in AVEVA
Cables Instrumentation for the project (if the project is shared with
Instrumentation) can added to diagrams.

Show Electrical Cables This option is disabled in Electrical.

Printing Tab

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:48 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Printing preferences are used to define printing settings for Cable Block Diagrams, including
Header and Footer text.

Export Tab

The Export tab is used to define Cable Block Diagram scaling settings for exports to
AutoCAD.
The default scaling are suitable for metric AutoCAD drawings. For imperial units (inches),
dividing the above units by approximately 25 is suggested.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:49 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Grid Settings Tab

This tab is used to control which user-defined fields are displayed in the Cable Block
Diagrams grid (if any) and what they are to be called in the grid.
There are ten user-defined fields. By default, none of them are displayed in the Cable Block
Diagrams grid. To add a user-defined field to the grid, uncheck its Hidden checkbox. To
remove a field from the grid, re-check the checkbox.
As required, change the text in the Caption field to the required user-defined field name.
This name will be displayed in the Cable Block Diagrams grid column heading for the field if
it is added to the grid.

9.5 Add or Edit Cable Block Diagram Symbols


To view, edit and create symbols for use on cable block diagrams, Setup > Symbols > User
Defined in the Project tab. The User Defined Symbol List window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:50 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

The window displays each user-defined symbol and their object type.
If required, symbols may only be displayed from a specific library. Select the required
standard from the Library list.

Note: New libraries are created in the Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window. Refer to
Create New Symbols for details.

If only a certain type of symbol is required to be displayed (e.g. MCCs), select it from the
Type list.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of this display. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.
Continue at:
• Create New Symbols
• Cable Label Symbols
• Copy Symbols
• Import Symbols from another Project
• Edit Symbols
• Delete Symbols

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:51 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

9.5.1 Create New Symbols


To create a new symbol, click New. The Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window is then
displayed:

Enter the name of the new symbol in the Name field.


Select the library to which the symbol is to be added from the Library field list.
To create a new library, enter its name in the Library field. The new library will be created
when the new symbol is saved.
Select the equipment that the symbol is to represent from the Object type list.
Once an object type has been selected, the list of datalinks relevant to the selected object
type is displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:52 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

This list consists of all the fields that object type which may be selected to label the symbol,
divided into categories that can be expanded to view their contents by clicking on the
category title.
To select a datalink to label the symbol, select it from the list then drag and drop it onto the
drawing pane in the required position. For example:

Datalinks can subsequently be dragged and dropped to other positions as required.


To edit datalink text, right-click on the datalink and select the Edit Text option from the menu
that is then displayed, and enter the new datalink text:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:53 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

To delete a datalink, right-click on it and select the Delete option from the menu that is then
displayed.
To delete all datalinks, right-click on a datalink and select the Delete All option from the
menu that is then displayed.
To change the anchor point of the datalink text, right-click on it and select the Anchor option
from the menu that is then displayed, then select the Left, Centre or Right option as
required.
To change the font used for the datalink text, click Font. The Select Font window is then
displayed:

Select the required Font Family, Style, Weight, Stretch and Size and click OK.
To draw the new symbol, click Open Symbol Editor. The Symbol Editor window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:54 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Used to undo changes. CTRL+Z may also be used.

Used to redo changes. CTRL+Y may also be used.

Used to import a .dwg file which can then be edited as required. Opens a
standard Windows Open window from which the required file can be selected.

Pointer control used to select, move, resize and reshape objects in the
drawing pane.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:55 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Used to place a rectangle in the drawing pane.

Used to place an ellipse in the drawing pane.

Used to place a straight line in the drawing pane.

Pencil tool, used to draw a non-straight line in the drawing pane.

Used to place text in the drawing.

Used to control the font, text size etc of text placed in the drawing pane.
Opens the Select Font window (as described above).

Used to select the colour of objects and text placed in the drawing pane.
Opens the Select Colour window:

Used to specify the width of the lines of objects placed in the drawing pane.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:56 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Used to specify whether or not rectangles and ellipses are to be filled.

Used to specify the symbol line style. Displays the Select Line Style window:

The current position of the cursor in the drawing pane is displayed at the bottom of the
window.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.
Click OK to save the symbol drawing and exit the window. The symbol is then displayed in
the symbol display pane in the Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:57 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Cancel to exit the window without saving.


In the Symbol Detail window, use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and
- buttons at either end of this slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to
increase the zoom level to the maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the
default level.
Click Align to Top Left to move the symbol to the top-left of the symbol display pane.

9.5.2 Cable Label Symbols


In the case of cables, the Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window is used to define the
labels of cables only, by placing the required datalinks. The appearance of the actual cables
themselves is pre-defined and cannot edited.
If a cable label “symbol” is to be the one used in cable block diagrams, check the Default
Cable Label Symbol checkbox.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:58 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

If a cable label symbol has already been set as the one which will be used in diagrams, the
following message will be displayed:

To make the new cable label symbol the default for the diagrams click Yes. Otherwise click
No. The default symbol will remain unchanged.

9.5.3 Copy Symbols


New symbols can be created by copying and changing existing symbols. Select the symbol
to be copied from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Copy Selected. The
Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window is then displayed with the symbol displayed and
with default name of “copy of <copied symbol name>”. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:59 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Edit the symbol and add and edit its details as required (see above for details) and click OK.
The Copy Selected button is disabled if the Multi-Select checkbox is checked.

9.5.4 Import Symbols from another Project


To import symbols from another project, click Import symbols from other project. The
Select an AVEVA Instrumentation Project window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:60 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Select the required project and click Select. The Symbol List From Other Project window
is then displayed:

The window lists all the user-defined symbols in the selected project.
Use the scale slider at the bottom of the window or the + and - buttons at either end of this
slider to zoom in and out of the drawing pane. Click Max to increase the zoom level to the
maximum level. Click Restore to return the zoom level to the default level.
To import a symbol, select it and click Import. To select multiple symbols, check the Multi-
Select checkbox and click Import.
If a symbol being imported has the same name as one in the current project a message is
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:61 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Cable Block Diagrams

Click Yes to replace the existing symbol with the imported symbol.

9.5.5 Edit Symbols


To edit a symbol, select it from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Edit, or
double-click on it.
The Enhanced CBD Symbol Detail window is then displayed (see above). Edit the symbol
and its details as required and click OK.
The Edit button is disabled if the Multi-Select checkbox is checked.

9.5.6 Delete Symbols


To delete a symbol, select it from the User Defined Symbol List window and click Delete.
To delete multiple symbols, check the Multi-Select checkbox before clicking Delete.

Note: Be careful when deleting symbols as it is possible to delete symbols that have been
added to diagrams. No warning is issued. In such cases, the deleted symbols on
diagrams will be replaced by squares with the words “No Symbol” in them.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 9:62 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

10 Using Wiring Rules

AVEVA Electrical uses 'Wiring Rules' to auto generate typical equipment wiring/cabling.
Using the Wiring Rules features can save many hours otherwise required to build devices
and their associated terminal arrangements, cables, terminations etc in Wiring Manager.
By applying a Wiring Rule to an item, the following are defined:
• Terminal arrangements - the number of terminals, their markings and sequence.
• Default signal numbers (wire numbers) to be used on wire terminations.
• Default cable type - the type of catalogue cable (individual cores, pairs or triad etc),
whether shielded/screened, and whether armoured etc.
• Default cable number, which can based of the tag number fields of the items at either
end of the cable.
• Default wire terminations - how the cable is connected to the terminals (e.g. core 1 to
terminal 1, core 2 to terminal 2 etc) at either end.
When a wiring rule is applied to an item, the terminals are created, and the cable is created
and terminated at both ends. Wiring Manager always uses the next available spare
terminals.
For example, a motor could have three cables:
• Motor Power Cable
• Anti-condensation heater
• Over temperature protection (thermistor/klixon etc.)
The application of a wiring rule will create the three cables from the supply item to the motor,
and generate their terminal arrangements.
At any time after a Wiring rule is applied, the data that has been generated can be edited by:
• Re-running the Create Wiring command using a new or changed Wiring Rule - this
enables users to update terminal arrangements, cable type, terminations etc.
• Edit the cable details/type using the Cable Schedule user interface.
• Edit terminations using Wiring Manager - Equipment (the Wiring Manager Terminations
User Interface).
Wiring Rules are assigned from Wiring Manager's Equipment List. Refer to Create Wiring.
Wiring Rules can be modified or new rules created by a user. Refer to Wiring Rule
Definitions.

10.1 Create Wiring


To create wiring for equipment, select the loads to be wired in the Equipment List, and either
right-click and select Create Wiring, or click Create Wiring in the Actions section of the
List Tools - Equipment List tab.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Note: A supply must be assigned to an item in Electrical Engineer before wiring is created
for it.

The Create Electrical Wiring window is then displayed:

The window list the selected items that wiring rules may be applicable to (items without
supplies are included in this list, although they cannot be “wired”).
If a wiring rule has previously been applied to an item, it is displayed in the Wiring Rule
Name column.
To apply or change a wiring rule, click the button that is displayed in the column when the
mouse is hovered over it. The Wiring Rule Definitions window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Select the required rule from the list on the left. A graphical representation of the rule is
displayed on the right. Click Select to apply the rule to the item.
See Wiring Rule Definitions for information on creating and editing wiring rule definitions.
The selected rule is then displayed in the Wiring Rule Name column.
Check the Select checkboxes for the items to which rules are to be applied, then click
Create.
The selected wiring rules are then applied to the selected items, where possible. The
outcome of the wiring creation process for each selected item is displayed in the Result
column:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

If a wiring rule is applied successfully “Wiring created successfully”. is displayed. Otherwise


the reason for failure is displayed, e.g. “No wiring rule defined for the current equipment.”, or
“No supply assigned.”.

10.2 Wiring Rule Definitions


From the Project tab, select Setup, then select Wiring Rule Definitions. This displays the
Wiring Rules Definitions window below:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

This window contains a list of all Wiring Rules defined in the project database.
By clicking on a rule name in the left hand list Wiring Manager will display a graphical
representation of the rule in the picture frame to the right.
To add a new wiring rule definition, click New. Refer to Adding a New Wiring Rule Definition
for further details.
To open an existing rule for editing, select it from the list and click Edit or double-click on it.
Refer to Edit Wiring Rule Definitions for further details.
To delete a rule, select it from the list and click Delete.

10.3 Adding a New Wiring Rule Definition


From Wiring Rule Definitions window, click New. The Wiring Rules Editor window is then
displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:5 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Toolbar and Menu Options


Various functions are available to the user via the File, Edit and Equipment drop-down
menus, or by clicking the required button on the toolbar.

File Menu
Save Saves the rule to the database.

Export to PDF Exports the rule into a .pdf format file in the project’s Drawing
folder.

Export to XPS Exports the rule into an .xps format file in the project’s
Drawing folder. The filename used is the Equipment number.

Page Setup Displays the Page Setup window, which enables the user to
change the paper size and source, the orientation and the
size of the margins.

Print Preview Displays the Print preview window, which enables the user
to view the print before sending to a printer.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:6 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Print Displays the Print window, which enables the user to


customise the print.

Printing Enables the user to print the report to a defined size by


selecting a percentage. After selecting a percentage, the
Print preview window is displayed which allows the user to
view the print before sending to a printer.

Exit Closes the window.

Edit Menu
Trim Canvas Enables the user to change the size of canvas to the actually
size of the diagram.

Select All Selects all objects.

Delete All Deletes all non-mandatory objects.

Equipment Menu
Create New Used to add equipment to the rule diagram.

Toolbar
Save Saves the rule to the database.

Print Preview Displays the Print preview window, which enables the user
to view the print before sending to a printer.

Print Displays the Print window, enables allows the user to


customise the print.

Zoom Out Decreases the image size.

Zoom In Increases the image size.

Zoom Displays a menu with the following options:

Show Overview

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:7 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Show Overview Displays the Overview window which displays an overview


of the entire rule. For example:

Predefined Enables the user to select a predefined zoom percentage.


percentages

Zoom Normal Selecting Zoom Normal enables the user to revert back to
the default zoom.

Zoom In Increases the image size.

Zoom Displays a menu with the following options:

Enter the name of the new rule in the Wiring Rule Name field.
Now define the rule by adding equipment, cables (at least one), and by terminating the
cable cores.
Continue at:
• Add Equipment
• Add Cables
• Define Cable Properties
• Add Terminals
• Terminate Cables
• Delete Objects

10.3.1 Add Equipment


The first step in defining a Wiring Rule is to add the equipment.
To add equipment, either right-click on the blank drawing canvas and select Add New
Equipment, or select the Create New... option from the Equipment menu. The Equipment
Information window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:8 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

From the Equipment No. list, select either {TAGNO} or {SUPPLYTAGNO} as required.
Alternately, enter some other appropriate text in the Equipment No. field, and select an
equipment type from the Equipment Type list.
Click Save. The equipment is added to the graphical display. For example:

Repeat the above process until all the required equipment has been added. For example:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:9 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Equipment can be moved around the drawing canvas by clicking on it and dragging it to the
required location.
Continue at Add Cables.

10.3.2 Add Cables


After equipment has been added to a wiring rule, create cables to link the equipment.
Place the cursor over the centre of the supply equipment box. The cursor will change from
an arrow to a pointing hand. Click on this point. A green square will then be displayed in the
centre of the equipment symbol:

While holding down the mouse button, drag the cursor until it touches another equipment
box. A red box will then be displayed in the centre of the target equipment box:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:10 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Release the mouse button. The cable will then be created:

Repeat the process for each required cable:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:11 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Cables and cable labels can be repositioned by dragging if required. A cable can be made
straight by right-clicking and selecting the Make Straight option.
Continue at Define Cable Properties.

10.3.3 Define Cable Properties


After cables have been added to link the equipment, the properties of each cable should be
defined.
Right-click on a cable or its label, and select the Cable Properties option from the menu.
The Add New Cable window is then displayed:

Click the button in the Cable Catalogue field to display the Select a Cable from Catalogue
window:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:12 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Note: Only those cables in the Cable Catalogue that have been marked with 'Allow Use'
are shown in this selection list. 'Allow Use' pre-filters the catalogue cables that can
be used for the current project. Refer to Cable Catalogue for more information.

Select the cable type by either double-clicking on it, or by clicking on it and clicking Select.
In the Cable Number field, enter a default cable number, or select either {TAGNO} or
{SUPPLYTAGNO} from the list. If {TAGNO} the cable will be given the same number as the
load equipment. If {SUPPLYTAGNO} the cable will be given the same number as the supply
equipment.
Text may be added as a prefix or a suffix, for example: {TAGNO}P1. This will give the cable
the same number as the equipment it is feeding with a suffix of P1.
All cable numbers created using wiring rules will also be suffixed with an automatically
incremented number.
If the cable is a load cable, check the Load Cable checkbox.

At least one cable in a rule definition must be a load cable.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:13 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Click Save.
The cable type and default number are then displayed on the graphical representation.
Cables that have been defined are displayed in brown instead of red:

Repeat the above process for each cable. The rule can then be saved using the toolbar
button or the Save option on the File menu.
Continue at Add Terminals.

10.3.4 Add Terminals


To facilitate the automatic creation of cable terminations when the rule is applied, terminals
should be added to each of the equipment items, and the cables terminated at them.
To add terminals to equipment, right-click on the equipment and click Edit Detail. The
Equipment Layout window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:14 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Use the facilities provided by this window to add the required terminal strips, for example:

Refer to Add Terminal Strips and Earth Bars for further details.
Once this has been done, continue at Terminate Cables.

10.3.5 Terminate Cables


Once terminals have been added, terminate the cables using the Terminations window.
Access this either from the Edit Terminations button on the Equipment Layout window, or
by right-clicking on the equipment in the Wiring Rules Editor window and selecting Edit
Terminations.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:15 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Use the facilities provided by this window to terminate the cables and cores. Refer to
Terminations User Interface for further details.
The rule is now complete.

Note: A termination report for an equipment item can be viewed by right-clicking on the
equipment in the Wiring Rules Editor window and selecting Termination Report.
The the AVEVA Electrical Termination Reports window is then displayed. Refer to
Termination Reports for details.

10.3.6 Delete Objects


To delete equipment, right-click and select Delete Equipment option.
Any cable attached to the equipment will also be deleted.
Note that equipment with equipment numbers of {TAGNO} and {SUPPLYTAGNO} cannot
be deleted.
To delete all objects that can be deleted, select the Delete All option from the Edit menu.

10.4 Edit Wiring Rule Definitions


Select the rule to be edited from Wiring Rule Definitions window, then click Edit or double-
click on it. The Wiring Rules Editor window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:16 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Edit the rule using the facilities provided by this window, as described in Adding a New
Wiring Rule Definition.

10.5 Field Device Wiring Reports


Field Device Wiring Check Reports show a graphical report of all wiring connected to field
devices. The report may be printed directly to a printer or saved as a PDF, XPS or AutoCAD
file.
To view a Field Device Wiring Check Report, in the Equipment View, right-click on the Field
Device and select the Wiring Check Report from the menu.
This option will only be available for field devices that have had wiring created for them.
The Wiring Check Report window is then displayed:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:17 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

To view and edit the terminations of a field device or other item of equipment, right-click on it
and select Edit Terminations. The Terminations window is then displayed. Refer to
Terminations User Interface for further information.
To access a graphical report on the terminations of an equipment item, right-click on it and
select Termination Report. A Termination report is then displayed. Refer to Termination
Reports for further information.
Various functions are available to the user via the File, Edit, View and Layout drop-down
menus, or by clicking the required button on the toolbar.

File Menu
Save Saves the report to the database. This option is available on
the toolbar.

Refresh Updates and reloads the Equipment data and refreshes the
window. This option is available on the toolbar.

Export to PDF Not applicable to Wiring Reports.

Export to XPS Exports the report to a .PDF format file in the project’s
Drawing folder. The filename used is either the Sketch
Number, as defined in the Equipment List, or if no sketch
number exists, the Equipment number.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:18 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Export to AutoCAD Exports the report to an .XPS format file in the project’s
Drawing folder. The filename used is either the Sketch
Number, as defined in the Equipment List, or if no sketch
number exists, the Equipment number.

Page Setup Selecting this option exports the report to AutoCAD.

Print Preview Displays the Page Setup window, which enables the user to
change the paper size and source, the orientation and the
size of the margins.

Print Displays the Print preview window, which enables the user
to view the report before sending it to a printer. This option is
available on the toolbar.

Printing Displays the Print window, which enables allows the user to
customise the print. This option is available on the toolbar.

Preferences Displays a Preferences window.

Exit Closes the report window.

Edit Menu
Undo Undoes the last command. This option is available on the
toolbar.

Redo Redoes the last undo. This option is available on the toolbar.

Trim Canvas Enables the user to change the size of canvas to the actually
size of the diagram.

Select All Selects all objects.

Find Equipment Displays the Find Text window allowing the user to search
for a string of characters.

Insert Note Opens a text box into which a note can be entered. The text
box can be positioned in the report by clicking on it and
dragging it to the required position.

Insert Rev Used to add a revision information block to the diagram,


which the user may then type the required data into.

Insert Document No. Used to add a document number information block, which
the user may then type the required data into.

View Menu
Show Overview Display the Overview window, which displays all the report
pages.

Predefined percentage Enables the user to select a predefined zoom percentage.

Zoom Normal Sets the report back to the default zoom.

Zoom to Fit Zooms the report to fit all the pages into the window. This
option is available on the toolbar.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:19 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Zoom In Increases the image size of the report. This option is


available on the toolbar.

Zoom Out Decreases the image size of the report. This option is
available on the toolbar.

Layout Menu
Align Horizontally Moves two or more selected nodes to the same row, aligned
with the first selected node.

Align Vertically Moves two or more selected nodes to same column, aligned
with first selected node.

Layout Equipment Used to layout diagrams automatically by positioning the


(Flat) Items and routing the links horizontally.

Layout Equipment Used to layout diagram automatically by positioning the


(Tree) Items and routing the links as a tree.

Make Sub Diagram Used to select multiple items of equipment and group them
together in a sub-diagram.

Layout Sub Diagram Used to layout the item inside the sub diagrams
automatically.

Group Selected Used to select multiply items of equipment and group them
together.

Ungroup Selected Used to ungroup multiply items of equipment which were


grouped together using the Group Selected option.

10.5.1 Preferences
Wiring Check Report preferences can be set from the Preferences window. To display the
Preferences window select File > Preferences.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:20 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

General Tab

The General tab is used to specify how reports are displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:21 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Cables/Wires Tab

The Cable/Wires tab is used to specify how the cables and wires will be displayed in
reports.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:22 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Printing Tab

The Printing tab is used to set the default paper size, orientation and margins, the
maximum number of terminals that can be displayed on each page and to add a header and
footer to the pages.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:23 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Export Tab

The Export tab is used to define the settings to be used when exporting the report to
AutoCAD.

Note: A user must have AutoCAD installed on their workstation to export a report
successfully.

The user can change the preferences back to the default settings by clicking Use Default.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Preferences window, or Cancel to close the
Preferences window without saving any changes.
If OK is clicked a warning message is displayed, informing the user that applying the new
settings will cause the diagram to reload.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:24 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

Click Yes to continue or No to terminate the process.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:25 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Using Wiring Rules

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 10:26 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Exports

11 Exports

This section describes the export options available on the Manage tab.
Continue at:
• Export to Excel
• Export to XPS and PDF Files
• Export to AVEVA NET

11.1 Export to Excel


The contents of all the grids and catalogues accessible from the Select option on the Home
tab can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet with same layout of columns and rows.
Data can also be exported to an Excel spreadsheet from a number of windows that display
data in a grid.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

11.2 Export to XPS and PDF Files


The contents of all the grids and catalogues accessible from the Select option on the Home
tab can be exported to PDF and XPS files.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

11.3 Export to AVEVA NET


AVEVA Electrical Wiring Manager includes facilities to export files of item data for import into
AVEVA NET.
The following can be exported:
• Equipment data
• Cable schedule data
• Cable drum schedule data
• Major equipment catalogue data
• Cable catalogue data
The files produced by the exported can subsequently be imported into AVEVA NET Portal
(refer to AVEVA NET documentation for details).

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Exports

11.3.1 AVEVA NET Export Configuration


Before files can be exported for AVEVA NET, the export must be configured.
From the Project tab, click Setup, then Publish to AVEVA NET Configuration. The
AVEVA NET Export Configuration window is then displayed.

Electrical data of various types and from different sources can be exported to AVEVA NET,
for example equipment or cable data. From the Name field, select the type of data export to
AVEVA NET to be configured.
If a log file is to be generated for the export type, check the Log Enabled checkbox.
The Log File field will then become enabled. In the field, specify the file name and the
location of the log file (a .txt file). Click the … button to browse for the required folder.
In the Staging Area field, specify the top level folder into which files are to be exported.
Click the … button to browse for the required folder.
If the Create Trigger File checkbox is checked, a trigger.start file (an empty text file) is
created in the staging area folder for each file type. The purpose of the trigger.start file is to
trigger the AVEVA NET Portal’s import controller to automatically process all the files that
reside in the same folder.
If, for every object being exported, a separate output file is to be generated, check the
Output File Per Object checkbox.
To select mapping files for the export of data and specify other settings, click Settings. The
Non-CAD Mapping Configuration window is then displayed.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Exports

The mappings between Electrical data and AVEVA NET Portal format data are stored in
XML files, one for each of the types of mapping:
• Object Mapping
• Class Mapping
For details of these files, refer to AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files.
Click the appropriate … button to browse for the required mapping file.

Click the open file button to open the selected file. It will open in the default text editor,
for example Notepad.
If no file is specified in the field, a new, blank .txt file is opened. If a file is specified that does
not exist, the user will be asked if they want to create that file at the specified location. If Yes
is clicked, a new blank .txt file is created and opened for editing.
To populate the fields with the default mapping files supplied with AVEVA Electrical, click
Copy Sample Files.

11.3.2 Export Data


To export data from the Equipment List, Cable Schedule, Cable Drums, Major Equipment
Catalogue and Cable Catalogue grids, select the items from the grid and from the Manage
tab, click Publish to AVEVA NET in the Integration section.
The Export To AVEVA NET window is then displayed, showing the progress of the import:

Once the export is completed, the Export Report window is displayed, listing the items for
which a data export was requested and whether or not that export was successful or not:

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:3 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Exports

11.3.3 Export Overview


AVEVA Schematic Gateway is a common Gateway that will be used by different AVEVA
schematic applications to export various kinds of data to AVEVA NET. This Gateway refers
to various configurations which are provided to it through various configuration files
(described in sections below).
As of now, AVEVA Schematic Gateway processes data (provided to it in a form of a Dataset)
as well some external files (Excel spreadsheets - xls and xlsx, PDF files).
• Data provided to the Gateway through dataset gets processed and output gets
generated into EIWM format.
• Gateway processes excel spreadsheets and produces output in MHTML format.
• Gateway processes PDF files and produces output in PDF format.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 11:4 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Work Packs

12 Work Packs

Work packs can be created which consist of collections of items with shared project
management requirements or properties. For example, all the items an individual user or
group of users is concerned with may be assigned to a single work pack. Time constraints
may be assigned to work packs, for example the required start and completion dates of
items in the a work pack, so that work can be more easily prioritised.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Work Packs

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 12:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Change Reports

13 Change Reports

The following change reporting facilities are available in AVEVA Electrical:


• Audit Manager
• Database Revisions

13.1 Audit Manager


AVEVA Electrical has an in-built Audit Manager that enables users to view database
changes made during the project in the database audit log. The Audit Log contains a list of
new and old database field values for each AVEVA Electrical object and includes a time
stamp and user's name who initiated the change.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

13.2 Database Revisions


AVEVA Electrical allows users to make a copy of the current database state by saving the
database as a Database Revision. At any time, the current database can be compared to a
saved Database Revision. The feature can be used to track changes between key
milestones in the project, for example between data when documents were 'Issued for
Tender', 'Issued for Purchase' or 'Issued for Construction'.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 13:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Change Reports

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 13:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Report Manager

14 Report Manager

AVEVE Electrical Wiring Manager has an in-built Report Manager that enables users to
create and modify reports.
For a description of this functionality, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 14:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
Report Manager

© Copyright 2000 to current year. 14:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

A AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

The following configuration files will be used by the AVEVA Schematic Gateway to process
the input:
• Project Configuration
• Object Mapping
• Class Mapping
For a description of these files, refer to the Common Functionality User Guide.

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide
AVEVA NET Export Configuration Files

© Copyright 2000 to current year. A:2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

Index

A Cable Sizing Check Report . . . . . . 6:21


Cable Sizing Export . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Access Cable Sizing Import . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Field Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:65 Calculate Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 External Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Adding Catalogue Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11, 5:39
Area, Buildings and Equipment Rooms 4:6 Changing
Cables to Cable Catalogue . . . . . . 5:40 Cable Core Markings . . . . . . . . . . . 5:47
Catalogue I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . 4:72 Terminal Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:20
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:28 Copying Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15
DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:27 Copying Cables (with Equipment) . . . . 4:34
Earth Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:26 Copying Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:34
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Create
Equipment to the Catalogue . . . . . . 4:64 Links and Looping Wires . . . . . . . . 7:17
Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12 New Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Group Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:33 New Project Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5
Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:26 Create or Import Multiple Major Equipment 4:41
Assign
Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:22
Audit Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
D
Auto Cross Patch Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:18 Defining
Automatic Ferrule Numbering . . . . . . . . . 8:3 New Mapping Definition 4:50, 4:60, 5:28,
AVEVA Cable Design Data Interface . . 5:30 5:52, 5:61, 6:18, 7:25
AVEVA Instrumentation 4:6, 4:38, 5:3, 7:21 Device Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:67
DIN Rails
C Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:27

Cable Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1


Cable Cores not Terminated . . . . . . . . . 5:38
E
Cable Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:20 Editing
Cable Ends Catalogue Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:45
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12 Catalogue Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:70
Cable Gland Adapter Catalogue . . . . . . 5:57 Catalogue I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . 4:74
Cable Gland Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:55 Catalogue Major Equipment . . . . . 4:64
Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Editing and Renaming Items in the Equipment

© Copyright 2000 to current year. Index page 1 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Electrical Wiring Manager User Guide

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16 S
Equipment Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:63
Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:36 Selecting
Export Cable Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29
to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:32
to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Signal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
to XPS and PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Export to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 T
External Cable Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Terminals
Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
F Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Ferrule Numbering Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Ferrule Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2 Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Finding and Replacing Text in a Grid . . . 2:5 Terminate Wires/Cores . . . . . . . . . 7:11
Termination
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
G Termination Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:53
Grid Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5 Tracing Wire Interconnections . . . . . . . 7:19
Grid Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
W
I Wire Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:19
I/O Module Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:71 Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Import Cables from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . 5:25 Wire Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
Import Equipment from Excel . . . . . . . . 4:48 Wires/Cores
Import Multiple Major Equipment . . . . . 4:41 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
Importing Attached Documents Data . . 4:59 Terminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
Importing Cable Gland and Cable Gland Adaptor Wiring Manager Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Catalogue Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . . 5:59 Wiring Rule Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4
Importing Catalogue Cables . . . . . . . . . 5:49 Wiring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Importing Catalogue Items from another Project Work Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
4:74
Importing Terminations from Excel . . . . 7:22

M
Major Equipment Catalogue . . . . . . . . . 4:63
Merge Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:23
Modifying Earth Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:33
Modifying Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . 4:33
Multiple Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:28

O
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

R
Relays
Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:28
Report Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Revision Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:54

© Copyright 2000 to current year. Index page 2 12 Series


AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai